<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Anw</id>
	<title>CTLTMS - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Anw"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php/Special:Contributions/Anw"/>
	<updated>2026-06-26T11:08:50Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.39.8</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=File:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png&amp;diff=1381</id>
		<title>File:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=File:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png&amp;diff=1381"/>
		<updated>2025-12-03T14:04:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Anw uploaded a new version of File:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Doc_TitleNew&amp;diff=1380</id>
		<title>Template:Doc TitleNew</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Doc_TitleNew&amp;diff=1380"/>
		<updated>2025-12-03T13:59:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Updated&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Aptean Logo.png|150px|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{{Client}}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;7&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{{Title}}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq: {{{Type|FS}}} | FS |Functional Specification |&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq: {{{Type|FS}}} | REQ |Requirements |&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq: {{{Type|FS}}} | SDD |Solution Design |&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq: {{{Type|FS}}} | UG |User Guide |&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq: {{{Type|FS}}} | WI |Work Instruction |&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq: {{{Type|FS}}} | OV |Overview |&lt;br /&gt;
Functional Specification&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{{Date}}} {{#ifeq: {{{Version|}}} | | | - &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;obs_docvers&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{{Version}}}&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; }}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Reference: {{{Reference}}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Templates|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=UG_440451_CTL-TMS_Vehicle_Fleet_Reference_Guide&amp;diff=1379</id>
		<title>UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=UG_440451_CTL-TMS_Vehicle_Fleet_Reference_Guide&amp;diff=1379"/>
		<updated>2025-12-03T13:26:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: v3.01.62 - Changes for mobile device operation (772661)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Template:Doc_TitleNew&lt;br /&gt;
|Client=Aptean&lt;br /&gt;
|System=''CALIDUS'' Total Logistics TMS&lt;br /&gt;
|Title=CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide&lt;br /&gt;
|Reference=UG 440451&lt;br /&gt;
|Version=3.01.62&lt;br /&gt;
|Date=3rd December 2025&lt;br /&gt;
|Year=2025&lt;br /&gt;
|Type=UG&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide|0]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Call_Logging_-_Tyres&amp;diff=1378</id>
		<title>Call Logging - Tyres</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Call_Logging_-_Tyres&amp;diff=1378"/>
		<updated>2025-12-03T13:15:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Added details of Show/Hide button and panels taking the best available space. (v3.01.62/772661)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This screen allows you to control the booking process of an order, and control the continued contact with the customer to affect a seamless delivery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-FilterMain.png|''Call Logging''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
* Quickly find orders through a variety of criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* See all pertinent information about the customer's order, to aid in responding to customer queries.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add instructions to the driver, including &amp;quot;Call X Minutes Before Arrival&amp;quot; information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Book an order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add additional services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can query orders by entering criteria in the Search panel:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - a drop-down list of all configured parent customers in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer'' - the orders' customer code. You can enter the code directly or use the {{Button|Lookup}} button to find a customer. The screen will display a pop-up customer search window, allowing you to search by ''Name'', ''Address'' or ''Postcode''. You can enter partials of any of these. You can cancel the query by closing the pop-up window, or display matching results by pressing the '''Find''' button. The screen will display a pop-up window of matching customers in a results table. You can return to the customer search window by closing the results window or clicking the '''Cancel''' button. You can select a customer by clicking on the row for that customer. The screen will close both the results and customer search windows and enter the customer code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Depot'' - the depot that owns the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - the order's customer reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Status'' - a drop-down list of all order statuses configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Location'' - the location of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date From'' - the date from which orders are selected. The screen will default this to today's date. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button to select a date. The date cannot be more than 7 days in the past.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date To'' - the date up to which orders are selected. The screen will default this to 10 days into the future. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button to select a date. The date cannot be less than the date from.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type'' - a drop-down list of all order types configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - a drop-down list of all service levels configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reset the query criteria to the default values by clicking the '''Clear''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click the '''Find''' button to execute the query - the screen will display the matching orders in the results table.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Main.png|''Results after filtering''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} The last 10 orders you select will be shown in the Recent Orders list in the Search panel - you can quickly re-select a previous order (regardless of search criteria you now have) by clicking on the order row in this list  - the screen will display the Details panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to display the following fields in the results table (using the {{Button|Column Selector}}:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver PostCode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Postal Region''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To Name''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Type''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Current Location''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Mode''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Active''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Vehicle''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Technician''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Process Id''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Update Counter''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of jobs is colour coded:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Unscheduled/Invalid - Red&lt;br /&gt;
*	Booked/Scheduled - Amber&lt;br /&gt;
*	Complete/Delivered - Green&lt;br /&gt;
*	Failed/cancelled/On-hold - normal white/grey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select an order to view or edit by clicking on the row - the screen will display the Details panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png|''Detail panel, showing common details, details tab and notes''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Details panel is made up of multiple sections:&lt;br /&gt;
* Common order details, situated on the top-left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* Additional details, situated in the top-right of the screen. You can select different detailed information to view or edit using the tab bar provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notes, situated at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create a new order by opening the Details panel and clicking on the {{Button|New}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating or updating a job, the screen will check the credit status limit of the customer selected through the unique customer code. This will check with Elucid directly, and that credit status limit (of the child or parent account) will be used when checking whether products may be fitted, or services rendered. Note that this may also include unposted or incomplete sales invoices / credit notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This check on credit limits also applies when adding new lines to a job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Order Details section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Status'' - the booking status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Ref'' - the TMS order reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - the order's customer reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status'' - the order status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Code'' - the customer of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - the parent customer of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collection'' details, including the address and collection window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Delivery'' details, including the address and delivery window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Weight'' - the total weight of all items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Items'' - the number of items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Volume'' - the total volume of the items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - the order's service level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter or amend the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Driver Instructions'' - any general instructions to the driver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also see:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer instructions'' - any instructions configured against the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Preferred Brand'' - any preferred brand information configured against the custome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also click the {{Button|Run SLA Report}} button to view any additional customer restrictions if configured against the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of the other buttons are located above this panel.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can save the changed details of the order in this section using the '''Save''' button. The screen will leave the order open for further amendments. &lt;br /&gt;
* If you have finished with the order, you can click the '''Save and Close''' button instead to save the details and close the details window.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can refresh the order details using the '''Refresh''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can close the details section without saving any changes using the '''Close''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can show and hide this panel with the '''Show/Hide''' button.  The other Additional Details tab panels detailed below will expand to use the extra space. This is most useful for mobile devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the following buttons on this tab:&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|New}} - create a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Delete}} - delete an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Help}} - help on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Undo}} - Undo any changes since last save.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Clear}} - clear all fields.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Toggle}} - toggle display of all accordion headers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen allows you to reject (cancel) a job using the {{Button|Delete}} button. In this case, you are requested to enter a reason why this was rejected.&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the call is taken, the user quotes a price to the customer, the customer rejects the price. The job will be captured, but the job will be cancelled with a reason code (e.g. too pricey).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional Details section ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Additional Details section consists of the following tabs:&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Details'' - additional order details information.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Contact'' - customer contact information.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Tyres'' - deliverable tyres and services.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Booking'' - book the dates and times of the job.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Services'' - a facility to add equipment and services to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Trips'' - the booked trip for the job, in terms of pickup and drop-off times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Details tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you enter all of the details for a new order, or amend details for an existing order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png|''Details tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - generated automatically by the system when the job is saved.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Breakdown Ref'' - a third-party reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Authorisation Code'' - required authorisation code from the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - the parent customer. A lookup is provided with search criteria. If a parent customer is selected, this will filter the Customer lookup. If you enter a customer first, the Invoice To field will automatically populate.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer'' - the customer. A lookup is provided with search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Actual Customer'' - a text field for reporting purposes - only entered when the customer selected is a &amp;quot;slush account&amp;quot; combining many small customers. This will appear in the customer name on the service report if populated.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Use Planning Region'' - limit the selection of locations to those your user is allowed to see.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Location'' - the job location. A lookup is provided. The lookup will show only the addresses for that customer, and optionally only those within your user's configured planning region.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Depot'' - the owning depot of the job - this will default to your configured depot. A lookup is provided. The lookup will sort based on the distance away from the callout location, and this distance is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Carrier'' - the depot executing the job. This will default to your configured depot. A lookup is provided. The lookup will sort based on the distance away from the callout location, and this distance is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - the service level. A drop-down list of service levels is provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg No/Fleet No'' - the vehicle being serviced for non-fleet inspection jobs. A lookup is provided with search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the call-out is not at a known address, the user can search for and select a location from the map, which will create a new location for the job and customer. There are editing facilities to the address after selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also add a new vehicle for this customer and location using the {{Button|New Vehicle}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
You will be prompted to enter:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg No/Fleet No'': This is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Vehicle Type'': This is required. You can select from a drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description'': This is freetext and optional.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Axle Configuration'': This is optional. See notes below.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Fleet Location'': This will default to the fleet location selected as the job destination location. You can change this through the lookup provided.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|&lt;br /&gt;
* Once a vehicle is created without a configuration in the call logging screen, this vehicle cannot then be amended in this screen to add the configuration. The Vehicle Fleet Maintenance screen can be used to modify the vehicle and add a configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
* The selected vehicle may now not have an axle configuration against it, so the tyre positions will not be known. In this case, the screen will check and will only allow van stock to be booked if the vehicle does not have an axle configuration associated to it.&lt;br /&gt;
* If fitment of new or other tyres, or services are to be installed on the vehicle, then you should write the position and required work in the notes, so that the technician can see them and do the work required. Tyres should be booked as van stock if required.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have added these details and saved, you can move on to other details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contact tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab shows all of the end customer contact information for the order in a table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Contacts.png|''Contacts tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Contacts - any contacts you have added or amended against this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Location Contacts - pre-saved contacts against the from location, to location or against the customer's default (billing or invoice) location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{Button|New Order Contact}} button will create a new order contact in the table below. You can also save this new contact to the location for re-use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location contacts are preconfigured for contact preferences:&lt;br /&gt;
* Report - use this contact to email the completed service report.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tracking - use this contact to email tracking emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, order contacts can be specified for Text, which will send the phone information against that contact to the EPOD system, so the technician can contact the customer directly via text or phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any location contacts that are checked will be used - if you want to change that, select the contact and save as an order contact, and change the contact preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the contacts used against an order, click on it in the bottom Location Contacts list and save - this will save this as an Order Contact (which will over-ride the Location contacts). They you can change the check boxes against the order contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any location contacts that have been overridden in order contacts will be indicated by the row being greyed out - you will not be able to select that location contact again unless you delete the order contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning}} When you want to override a location contact, do not change the forename, surname, email or telephone details. If you do change these, this is then seen as a different order contact, and doesn't override the existing location contact. You will see that, because the location contact will not be greyed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to email the completion report to all contacts that have been defaulted as &amp;quot;Report&amp;quot; against the order and locations, you don't have to change anything - all of the emails against those ticked contacts will be sent to EPOD for the sending of the completion report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to add a contact JUST FOR THIS ORDER ONLY, click the {{Button|New Order Contact}} button and enter the details. Do not check the &amp;quot;Save as Location&amp;quot; check box and click {{Button|Save}}. This will create a new order contact, for this order only, and will appear just in the Order Contacts table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to add a contact for any orders to this location from this point forwards, click the {{Button|New Order Contact}} button and enter the details. Check the &amp;quot;Save as Location&amp;quot; check box and click {{Button|Save}}. This will create a new order contact, for this order only. This contact will appear in the Order Contacts table, and also in the Location Contacts table below, but greyed out (as there is an order contact over-riding it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change a contact so that it doesn't send the report from this point forward for any jobs, select the contact in the Location Contacts table, then untick the Report box and click {{Button|Save}}. This will update the location contact. This will also create this as an order contact, so you can change it on this order alone if you want to - the location contact will be greyed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change a contact so that it doesn't send the report FOR THIS ORDER ONLY, select the contact in the Location Contacts table and click {{Button|Save}} - that will create an order contact. Then select the order contact created and untick the Report box and click {{Button|Save}}. This will update the order contact only and over-ride the location contact. The contact will be greyed out in the Location Contacts section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to add some more emails or phone numbers for an existing location contact, create a new order or location contact as described above, and change the phone and/or email information. You will end up with multiple order and/or location contacts, depending on which of the scenarios above you followed. Any matching location contacts will be greyed out and over-ridden if all of the contact information is the same in the order contact compared to the location contact (i.e. the forename, surname, phone and email).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tyres tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays the summary of types of items on the order (the order lines) and can display each individual order item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays the order summary (lines) in a table with the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Work Type'' - one of Fit New, Fit Other, Services Only, Van Stock, Removal.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Position''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Services'' - popup to show services booked on this line.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Product''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Store''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Quantity''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Price''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres3.png|''Tyres panel''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click on an existing tyre to edit it, or add a new tyre with the {{Button|New}} button. In both cases, the screen will display the Items popup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be allowed to select the type of work being booked to a job when selecting tyres:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fit New&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fit Other&lt;br /&gt;
*	Services Only&lt;br /&gt;
*	Van Stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general, most deliverables work the same way:&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a vehicle position&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a product using the Part Search lookup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-PartSearch1.png|''Part Search Parameters''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Search allows you to select parameters for the search - they are matched partially:&lt;br /&gt;
* Product&lt;br /&gt;
* Depot&lt;br /&gt;
* Description&lt;br /&gt;
* Manufacturer&lt;br /&gt;
The screen also displays the nearest stock holding location, for information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching parts are displayed, and you can select the part you need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-PartSearch2.png|''Part Search Results''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Fit New:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Select a depot and position.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Search for a part using the part search.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Once selected, all of the details are displayed, and the quantity is defaulted to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres2.png|''Fit New''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Work Type	Option select one, default to Fit New&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Defaulted&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Lookup - part search&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Set from product, can be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product -label changed to Diameter&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On clicking save, the screen will add a tyre to the selected tyres and display the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If new tyres are to be installed on the vehicle, then the user should book van stock against the job and write the position in the notes, so that the technician can see them and do the work required. Tyres should be booked as van stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Services Only, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-ServicesOnly.png|''Services Only''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Not enabled, as not selecting a product to sell&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will also show all services that can be supplied to that vehicle type that are related to a tyre position. The user must select at least one of these services, although several can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On saving, the service supplied will be saved and displayed in the booked work list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Van Stock, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-VanStock.png|''Van Stock''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Default to depot, select from drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Lookup - part search&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Must be entered with a quantity greater than 0&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On clicking save, the screen will add the selected quantity of tyres and display the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Fit Other, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-FitOther.png|''Fit Other''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Part search, but just for product, not store, can be left blank&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Blank&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The part search in this instance will be searching for any product code, not specifically those sold by the depot, just any known product, as this is intended to allow the user to book customer-owned product rather that sell them a tyre from depot stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will also show all services that can be supplied to that vehicle type that are related to a tyre position. The user must select at least one of these services, although several can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Booking tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to modify the delivery date of the order based on the customer's requirements, and to select the technician and vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Booking.png|''Booking tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can manually set a booking date and time window here. This will default to today’s date, and to the expected delivery time, based on the service level. For example, if the time is 1200, and the service level is 60-90 minutes, the book time will default to 1330.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a job is created, a service level will be identified. This, along with the start/booked time, will determine the window for the job. For example, &amp;quot;60-90 minutes&amp;quot; may be a service level. If the job is booked at the correct time of 1200, the window will be 1200-1330. &lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, scheduled jobs will typically be scheduled at 0600 on the day and will be able to be completed at any time of the day.&lt;br /&gt;
This will be used to determine whether the job was completed in time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will list the Technicians assigned to that selected carrier. The screen provides decision assistance to the operator to select the correct Technician. &lt;br /&gt;
The screen will use the current workload assigned to the Technician, how long they have been working on it, how long the job is expected to take and the current location of the Technician and progress through the current job and distance to the job in question to determine the potential arrival time. The screen will also show the shifts on which the technician is assigned, to aid in identifying the out-of-hours technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system uses the hub location of the technician to determine travel time. It also uses the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;to&amp;quot; locations of the order to determine the travel time from the hub location, to the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location (to pick up product) and then to the “to” location. The system uses average loading/fitment times depending on the number of tyres selected to determine the length of a job and factors this in, along with ETAs from the device if the job is in progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the order may now be booked from an outside store location, this is the location that is used to calculate the ETA of the technician at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current job will be determined by the job in progress on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
The current location will be determined from the device location.&lt;br /&gt;
The length of the job will be determined from the actions taking place or items being delivered. This will be configured against the line type, with each configured for a number of minutes per item. There are expected to be 3:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Fitment – for example, 15 minute per tyre fitted once the location is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Supply – for example, one minute per tyre being delivered.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Inspection – for example, 5 minutes per vehicle to be inspected, with the quantity of the line set to the number of vehicles, to give finer control of how long the job is expected to be.&lt;br /&gt;
If the driver arrived 5 minutes ago, and the job is expected to take 30 minutes based on these calculations, the system will know that there is an expected 25 minutes remaining on that job before they can depart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will indicate the availability of that driver, using the assigned shift and resource availability calendar to determine whether the driver may be used. As noted, this is decision assistance - the driver may still be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may then assign the technician's van, if required. If the technician has a default vehicle or is already working in a van, then this will be defaulted to that van. You can change the van here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once selected, click the {{Button|Book}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the technician or vehicle, click the {{Button|Release}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the call is logged, booked and assigned to the driver, the job will be planned onto the technician's workload and sent over to their device. This will generate a workload on the device (if one does not already exist), a collection job (if picking up van stock or installing a new tyre) and a service job of the type specified to do the work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a job is booked to a technician for the first job of that day, the system creates a workload for that technician, starting at the start-up time of that driver's shift, then factoring in the time as above from the specified start time of the job, to determine the ETA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the driver has a specific hub location (i.e. does not work directly in the carrier hub location), the system will use that specific hub location to determine the start and end points of the trip and therefore the travel time to the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Services tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to view set any additional equipment or services against the order. You can select from a drop-down list of configured services or equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Services.png|''Services tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For completed jobs, the services supplied against the job will be visible here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have selected the service or equipment, you can set the quantity and add it using the {{Button|New}} button provided. The screen will add this to the displayed list of equipment and services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trips tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display any trips onto which the order has been planned, showing all pickup and drop-off stops. You can use this information to quickly answer queries from the customer as to the planning status and progress of the delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Trips.png|''Trips tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display this information in a trips table, showing the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Trip Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Stop Type''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Location Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Location Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Planned''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Actual''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to enter notes against the order. You can see all previously-entered notes in a list, with the most recent on the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several of the actions that you take in this screen will automatically generate notes for you, to provide an audit trail of customer contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also enter any note, by keying the note in the ''Add New Note'' field and clicking the {{Button|Save}} button when you have finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen logs the creation and amendment date, time and user of all entered notes, whether they were entered automatically or manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Top-up Transfers ==&lt;br /&gt;
Top-up Transfers are a job type that allows tyres to be taken to a technician whilst on a job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a job in CTL, a new Job Type will be available called &amp;quot;Top-up Transfer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select this, the screen will allow you to select a technician and an order on which they require additional product – the screen will show the orders on the selected technician's current trip and allow them to select to job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will then copy the basic order details for a new job to transfer product to that technician. That will be customer, destination location, customer vehicle, etc. The job will not be saved automatically – the details will just be copied into the screen for you to save if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select depot and carrier like any other job.&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select product to deliver to the selected technician - this job type will be limited to just selecting van stock and entering the quantity. This will be exactly as the process selects van stock now as shown above. This involves identifying the product (through part search), selecting the product (including the store from which the product is sourced, which may be a depot store or outside store) and confirming the quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The job can then be booked to a technician to transport the product to the technician that needs it – this will be as per the normal booking process. This will be added to the transporting technician's work load, or a new work load created for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Outside Stores ==&lt;br /&gt;
All depots and hubs are stock holding locations. There are also satellite stock holding locations linked to depots, as well as stock held at customers’ depots (BRANCH locations) or at an agreed third-party location (like in a container).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When searching for products to sell, these can be sourced at any of these outside locations as well as at the depot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting tyres to install, the user can also select the store from which the tyre is to be picked up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will check the store of the tyre selected against any set up outside store (OS_STORE) locations set up in CTMS. If the location is set up, then the location will be used as the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location of that order, instead of the depot location. This will be displayed on the left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will not allow selection of parts from any other location other than that outside store if it exists. &lt;br /&gt;
Note that the screen will allow selection of products from multiple stores if they do not have a corresponding outside store location set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, for example, if there are three stores for SL67:&lt;br /&gt;
*	BMAIN – the depot&lt;br /&gt;
*	BCONTAINER – a container at the depot&lt;br /&gt;
*	OSSTORE1 – an off-depot location 3 miles away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OSSTORE1 is setup in CTMS as an OS_STORE location, whereas the others are not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an order, the user can select multiple tyres from both BMAIN and BCONTAINER together on the same order, as they are both considered to be located at the same place (the depot). They cannot also select product from OSSTORE1 on the same order.&lt;br /&gt;
The order will be considered to be starting at the depot location SL67.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a different order, the user can select multiple tyres from OSSTORE1. They cannot select any tyres from BMAIN or BCONTAINER.&lt;br /&gt;
The order will be considered to be starting at the outside store location OSSTORE1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Examples of Depot Locations and Outside Stores ==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from SL67 to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL67:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from OSSL117 (outside store based at SL117) to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at OSSL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from SL67 to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from OSSTORE1 to a roadside location OMS1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at OSSTORE1&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at OMS1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access Control and Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be set up through access control for access of CTMS and CTL systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The users should be assigned to an access control group – see standard functionality guides on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users should have parameters set against them, especially the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*	The existing BASED_AT will define the Central Tyre depot to which they have been assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
*	If the user should have access to all depots, then the ALL_DEPOTS parameter should be set instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CTL users must have access to the CTL menus through their assigned group (typically CTL):&lt;br /&gt;
*	FIA Reports - CTL-04-REP.CTL-04-REP-02&lt;br /&gt;
*	Maintenance - CTL.CTL-01-MNT&lt;br /&gt;
*	Process - CTL.CTL-03-ORD&lt;br /&gt;
*	Reports - CTL.CTL-04-REP&lt;br /&gt;
*	Root Menu - CTL.CTL-99-CTL&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tasks - CTL.CTL-02-TSK&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Call Logging - CTL-03-ORD.CTL-02-ORD-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Axle Configuration - CTL-01-MNT.CTL-01-MNT-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Fleet Maintenance - CTL-02-TSK.CTL-02-TSK-01&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these menus should NOT have &amp;quot;In Menu?&amp;quot; ticked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
External (e.g. ITDN) users also require the following parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
*	A new parameter &amp;quot;EXTERNAL_CALL_LOGGING&amp;quot; will be available. For external users of Call Logging (i.e. ITDN) this parameter should be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When locked to (based at) a single depot and creating a new order the depot (and from location of the order) will be defaulted to that depot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user is set as All Depots or has multiple depots, then the user must select the depot first before the From location is locked to that order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user is set as an external call logging user, the system will restrict the visibility and selection of price against a tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will be hidden when looking up a tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will not be displayed in product details&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will default to the selling price.&lt;br /&gt;
*	There will be no facility to change or enter the price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide|301-{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=FIA_Reports&amp;diff=1377</id>
		<title>FIA Reports</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=FIA_Reports&amp;diff=1377"/>
		<updated>2025-12-03T12:03:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Added mobile device section&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This is the FIA (Fleet Inspection Analysis reporting screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to run any or all of the FIA reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;340px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports.png|''FIA Report Selection''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the sections of the report to run here, and enter the report parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can clear the parameters, reset to the defaults or run the report from the buttons provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a report is run, this will open in a new tab and display the results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;340px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports_Results.png|''Reports''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can search each results table for specific records using the ''Search'' box provided and export the data from each result table to CSV, PDF or the clipboard using the buttons provided. These options will be shown when you hover your mouse over the table in the report. {{Note}}You cannot hover on a mobile device and therefore these options are not available on mobile devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also print the report using the browser Print option. When printed in this way, the results are paginated for printing and include an initial page and summary. {{Note}}For mobile devices, you may instead need to use the ''Share'' option from the hamburger menu of the device's browser window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The report is made up of several sections, each of which can be run separately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Company Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section summarises the customer fleet across the organisation and by location by vehicle class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;340px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports_Results_Company_Summary.png|''Reports''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inspections ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section shows detail of each inspection of each vehicle in the fleet in the period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;340px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports_Results_Inspection.png|''Reports''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tyre Brands ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section shows a summary of percentage tyre brands installed on vehicles in the fleet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;340px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports_Results_Tyre_Brand.png|''Reports''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tyre Sizes ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section shows a summary of percentage tyre sizes installed on vehicles in the fleet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;340px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports_Results_Tyre_Size.png|''Reports''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tyre Life ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section shows a summary of percentage expected tyre life of tyres installed on vehicles in the fleet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;340px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports_Results_Tyre_Life.png|''Reports''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pressure Analysis ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section shows comparisons of the recorded pressure within the period, with multiple subsections as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Summary&lt;br /&gt;
* By Axle Type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;340px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports_Results_Pressure.png|''Reports''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tread Depth Analysis ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section shows the recorded tread depths within the period in two bar charts:&lt;br /&gt;
* Summary across all tyre life&lt;br /&gt;
* Detail by Tyre Life i.e. New, Remould, New/Regrooved, Remould/Regrooved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;340px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports_Results_Tread_Depth.png|''Reports''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Problems and Actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
The section shows several subsections:&lt;br /&gt;
* Problem Analysis, a summary showing the percentage of issues noted during the fleet inspections in the period, categorised by Tyre or Pressure issues.&lt;br /&gt;
* Issues and Actions - a detailed list of all issues and actions in the period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;340px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports_Results_Problems.png|''Reports''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;340px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports_Results_Actions.png|''Reports''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The detail section shows the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date/Time''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg or Fleet No'' - the vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Type'' - the vehicle type.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Axle'' - the axle type&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Position'' - the tyre position&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reason'' - the noted action.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Notes'' - any notes on the above&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status'' - whether this action is closed or open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Recommended Replacements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will show tables of recommended replacements based on tread depth in the following categories:&lt;br /&gt;
* Summary - a count of all recommended replacements.&lt;br /&gt;
* Immediately&lt;br /&gt;
* Within 1 month&lt;br /&gt;
* Within 2-3 months&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;340px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports_Results_Replace_Summary.png|''Reports''&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_FIA_Reports_Results_Replace_Immediate.png|''Reports''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The results show:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Type'' - axle type.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg. Number'' - vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Position'' - tyre position.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Tyre Make''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Tyre Size''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Tyre Pattern''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Tread Depth''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Tyre Life'' - New/Remould and/or Regrooved.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Defects'' - a list of the reported defects&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide|221-{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=General_Screen_Usage&amp;diff=1376</id>
		<title>General Screen Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=General_Screen_Usage&amp;diff=1376"/>
		<updated>2025-12-03T11:57:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Added mobile device section&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Most screens in the system typically contain several elements:&lt;br /&gt;
* Header, containing:&lt;br /&gt;
** Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
** Filter.&lt;br /&gt;
** Button bar.&lt;br /&gt;
** Home button.&lt;br /&gt;
** Log Off button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Main results area.&lt;br /&gt;
* Detail panel.&lt;br /&gt;
* Footer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically there are also several pop-up windows that are shown in certain circumstances.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can go back to the home screen at any time using the {{Button|Home}} button on the header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can log out of the system using the {{Button|Sign Out}} button on the header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button bar on the header typically includes one or all of the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- * {{Button|Collapse}} - see [[#Detail Panel|Details Panel]] below. --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Query}} - See [[#Queries|Queries]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Refresh}} - See [[#Results Tables|Results Tables]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Settings}} - This displays a pop-up Preferences window. Here, you can choose any roles that have been assigned to you (which can change the function of some screens and the menu options you are presented with)&amp;lt;!-- or choose the look and feel of the system with the Theme drop-down list--&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- * {{Button|Widget}} - See [[#Widgets|Widgets]] below.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Export to Excel}} - See [[#Results Tables|Results Tables]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Export to CSV}} - See [[#Results Tables|Results Tables]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Add To Favorites}} - See [[#Menu|Menu]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Column Selector}} - See [[#Results Tables|Results Tables]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer shows the version of the system - you can use this when reporting any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- == Widgets ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning}} In Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
The menu is accessibly by clicking the {{Button|Menu}} button in the top left of the screen. This will display the menu. You can close the menu by clicking off the menu, or clicking the {{Button|Close}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The menu shows all the screens that you as a user of the system have been configured to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screens are categorised, so you can click on a category and see the screens (or sub-categories) that belong to that category. If you click again, the category will close.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can search for a specific screen using the search box provided at the top of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can open a screen in a new tab in your browser (if your browser supports tabs) by clicking the {{Button|Call-out}} button next to the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have identified screens as a favourite by using the Favourite button in the header, the menu will list these screens under a Favourite category in the menu. You can remove them from your favourites by clicking the {{Button|Close}} button to the right of the screen name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Queries ==&lt;br /&gt;
Most screens allow searching of the data by defining the criteria of the search - a query.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click the {{Button|Query}} button in the header to show the query pop-up. {{Note}} In some screens, this is a pop-out panel on the left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} If there isn't a lot of data to be displayed in the screen, all data may be displayed immediately without entering a query.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the screen, the filters will be displayed. In most cases, this is a list of all the data items you can find by. In some screens, you can choose the individual criteria one by one from a list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have entered your query criteria, you can run the query using the '''Submit''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can clear the criteria entered by clicking the '''Clear''' button. This will display the Results Table, as seen below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pop-up can be closed with the '''Close''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Results Tables ==&lt;br /&gt;
When queries are run (typically when the screen is first opened), the screen displays the results in a table. The screen will generally display the total records found in the footer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can sort the results table by clicking on a column header. If you click again, the sort will be reversed. You can sort on multiple columns by holding the control key when clicking - the screen will sort the data in the order that you click. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the data shown by entering into the filter columns provided by the screen. The screen provides a general filter on the header, and specific column filters under each column header. The filter is immediate - as you type, the results will be filtered. If you enter text in multiple columns, the screen will filter the data by all the entered filters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the order of columns by dragging the column header to a new position in the results table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the displayed columns in the results table using the {{Button|Column Selector}} button in the button bar. Here you can tick all columns you want to show in the results grid and also in the query filter. The screen provides buttons to '''Select All''', '''Deselect All''', '''Reset Visible''' and '''Reset Filter'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can move from the first to last record (and vice versa) quickly using the {{Button|First}} and {{Button|Last}} buttons on the footer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can see the details of the record in the results table by clicking the row - typically, the screen will display the details in a pop-out panel from the right of the screen. See [[#Details Panel|Details Panel]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can refresh the data shown in the results table by clicking the {{Button|Refresh}} button in the button bar in the header. The screen will re-run the query and re-display the results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Details Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display the Details panel from the right of the screen whenever you select a record from the results table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also choose to display the panel by dragging the panel open using the handle on the right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can close the Details panel by dragging it closed or clicking the {{Button|Right}} button on the top of the panel separator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the screen displays the Details panel as part of the main display window. When it displays, it reduces the amount of screen available for the results table, and the screen may display a scroll-bar in the results table so you can still see all data. You can change this by clicking the {{Button|Pin}} icon in the separator bar. This changes the detail panel so that it floats over the results table - in this mode, you will need to hide the panel to see the full results table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The options available on the details panel typically differ from screen to screen - see your specific screen documentation for details. However, you will normally find some or all of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|New}} - create a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Save}} - save a new record or changes to an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Delete}} - delete an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Help}} - help on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Undo}} - undo change made since last save.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Clear}} - clear all fields.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Toggle}} - toggle display of all accordion headers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically, the details panel displays a lot of data organised into sections - by default, all sections are displayed and you can scroll up or down to see all the details. You can collapse or show these sections by clicking in the header. You can collapse or show all sections by clicking the {{Button|Toggle}} button on the detail panel tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can scroll up and down the Details panel to see all the data. Moving down the list of results will also display a floating {{Button|Back to Top}} button in the bottom right of the panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the screen supports it, you can use this panel to enter new records or amend existing records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each field displays with an icon before it. When the screen requires that this is entered, this will be coloured red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can clear entered data or reset data to its original form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can save changes if allowed by using the {{Button|Save}} button. {{Note}} When you save changes, generally any filters you have applied to the results table will be undone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notifications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever you take actions in a screen, you will be notified of the success or failure of your actions through a notification message. These appear at the top of the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Informational messages are coloured green and will disappear after a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error messages are red and will stay on the screen until you clear them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Regardless of the type of pop-up message, you can clear them from the screen by clicking the {{Button|Close}} button on the right-hand side of the message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mobile Devices ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} This system is not intended to be used on phones - this is  desktop system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the system may be used on 8inch tablets or above through the browser (Chrome tested on Android).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
* The device will at times display a popup keyboard. This can be hidden by using the Back button on the device. Further, the screen above will scroll to allow you to see what is being entered, and you can move this by dragging above the keyboard. A Bluetooth keyboard can be attached to mitigate this.&lt;br /&gt;
* The application will not function properly in Portrait mode on mobile device. Turn orientation changes on the device off and lock to landscape mode to mitigate this and prevent the device switching orientations automatically. Note that the screens affected will inform you that the application should be run in Landscape mode and you will not be able to use the screen until you switch back.&lt;br /&gt;
* All popups will display using the maximum amount of space available in the browser. For some very large popups, you may be required to scroll to view buttons. Specifically, the New Tyre popup in Call Logging requires you to scroll to access the buttons - simply drag the screen to access them.&lt;br /&gt;
* Hover-over functionality is not supported on tablets, so popup help associated to fields and buttons is not accessible. Further, in any reports that support it, the export options to tables cannot be accessed on a mobile device.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:OrderDetails&amp;diff=1375</id>
		<title>Template:OrderDetails</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:OrderDetails&amp;diff=1375"/>
		<updated>2025-08-22T10:49:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Added TemplateData&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;The screen has a more complex query filter than normal, due to the amount of data available to be entered for orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, you select the field to be filtered from a drop-down list of all fields, then the operator, and then the value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq:{{{Type|}}}||&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_Orders1.png|''Orders - list''&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_Orders2.png|''Orders - status, references, type, instructions''&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_Orders3.png|''Orders - locations''&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_Orders4.png|''Orders - scheduling, requirements, transport units''&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_Orders5.png|''Orders - parameters, audit''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;|}}{{#ifeq:{{{Type|}}}|Enquiry|&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS_Order_Enquiry.png|''Orders enquiry''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of fields are:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Execution Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''TMS Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Entry Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collection Booking Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Organisation Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect  From Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect Address Line 1''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect Address Line 2''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect Address Line 3''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect Town''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect Country Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect PostCode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect Postal Region''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Address Line 1''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Address Line 2''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Address Line 3''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Town''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Country Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver PostCode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Postal Region''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Owner Location Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Owner Address Line 1''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Owner Address Line 2''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Owner Address Line 3''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Owner PostCode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Owner Postal Region''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Total Quantity''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Total Volume (m³)''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Total Weight (KG)''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Total BaseUE''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Revenue''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Cost''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Margin''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Active''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Process Id''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Update Counter''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The operators are:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Is Equal To'' - the orders' data must match your entered criteria exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Is Not Equal To'' - the orders' data must not match your entered criteria exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Is Greater Than'' - the orders' data must be greater, alphabetically or numerically, that your entered criteria. Note that symbols and a space are considered &amp;quot;less than&amp;quot; alphabetic or numeric data.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Is Less Than'' - the orders' data must be less than, alphabetically or numerically, that your entered criteria. Note that symbols and a space are considered &amp;quot;less than&amp;quot; alphabetic or numeric data.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Is Greater or Equal To'' - the orders' data must be greater than or exactly equal to, alphabetically or numerically, that your entered criteria. Note that symbols and a space are considered &amp;quot;less than&amp;quot; alphabetic or numeric data.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Is Less Than or Equal To'' - the orders' data must be less than or exactly equal to, alphabetically or numerically, that your entered criteria. Note that symbols and a space are considered &amp;quot;less than&amp;quot; alphabetic or numeric data.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Is In'' - the orders' data must be one of the values you listed in your criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Is Not In'' - the orders' data must be one of the values you listed in your criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Is Like'' - the orders' data must be similar to your entered criteria. Note that you must use a percentage symbol as a wildcard e.g. to find anything with the word &amp;quot;PLAN&amp;quot; anywhere, enter ''%PLAN%'', but find only things that start with &amp;quot;PLAN&amp;quot;, enter ''PLAN%''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Is Not Like'' - the orders' data must be similar to your entered criteria. The percentage wildcard can also used here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have entered your query criteria, you can run the query using the '''Submit''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can clear the criteria entered by clicking the '''Reset''' button. This will display the Results Table, as seen below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pop-up can be closed with the '''Cancel''' button or by closing the pop-up window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to display data as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Execution Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''TMS Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Entry Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collection Booking Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Organisation Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect  From Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect Address Line 1''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect Address Line 2''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect Address Line 3''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect Town''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect Country Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect PostCode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect Postal Region''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Address Line 1''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Address Line 2''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Address Line 3''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Town''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Country Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver PostCode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Postal Region''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Owner Location Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Owner Address Line 1''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Owner Address Line 2''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Owner Address Line 3''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Owner PostCode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Owner Postal Region''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Total Quantity''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Total Volume (m³)''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Total Weight (KG)''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Total BaseUE''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Revenue''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Cost''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Margin''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Active''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Process Id''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Update Counter''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq:{{{Type|}}}||The results table will colour the rows based on the order status. You can control the colours of each order status displayed using the [[Order Status]] screen.|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen has the following additional actions on the screen header:&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq:{{{Type|}}}||* {{Button|Booking}} - you can enter booking information once you have selected an order. &lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Consolidate}} - you can choose to consolidate multiple orders together by selecting multiple orders and then clicking this button.&lt;br /&gt;
|}}{{#ifeq:{{{Type|}}}|Template|* {{Button|Booking}} - you can enter booking information once you have selected an order template. &lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Consolidate}} - you can choose to consolidate multiple orders together by selecting multiple orders and then clicking this button.&lt;br /&gt;
|}}{{#ifeq:{{{Type|}}}|Enquiry|* {{Button|Print}} - you can print the order with this button.|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq:{{{Type|}}}|Enquiry||&lt;br /&gt;
== Consolidating {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|Order Templates|Orders}} ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can select multiple {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order templates|orders}} by clicking when using the shift and/or control keys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template||{{Note}} The orders you select must be UNPLANNED and have the same delivery and collect locations.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have selected multiple {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order templates|orders}}, you can click the {{Button|Consolidate}} button in the screen header. The screen will display a pop-up window showing a summary of all of the {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order templates|orders}}. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can confirm the consolidation by clicking the '''Consolidate Records''' button, or cancel the consolidation by closing the window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template||== Booking an Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click this button, the screen will display a pop-up window to enter booking information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect''/''Deliver'' - a option to select whether the booking information applies to the collection or the delivery of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Ref'' - a booking reference as provided to you.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Date'' - the date of the booking. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking From'' - the start time of the booking window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking To'' - the end time of the booking window.&lt;br /&gt;
You can save the booking information by clicking the '''Book In''' button, or cancel entry using the '''Cancel''' button or closing the pop-up window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding or Editing an {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|Order Template|Order}} ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following actions are available on the Details panel:&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|New}} - create a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Save}} - save a new record or changes to an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Delete}} - delete an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Help}} - help on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Undo}} - undo change made since last save.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Clear}} - clear all fields.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Template}} - create an {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}} from a template.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Cancel}} - cancel an {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}}.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Split}} - Split an {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}}.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Copy}} - Copy an existing {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}}.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Toggle}} - toggle display of all accordion headers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Template ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create an {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}} from a saved order template. {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template||You can create these in the [[Order Templates]] screen.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you click this button, the screen will display a list of all order templates created in the system:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Organisation Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}}, select the template from the list and click the '''Submit''' button. a new {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}} will be created, with the fields populated from the template, ready for you to amend and save like normal. Note that all details are copied, including lines and items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template||== Cancel an Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can cancel an order by clicking the {{Button|Cancel}} button. The order's status will be set to cancelled and the order re-displayed with this status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Split an {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|Order Template|Order}} ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can split an {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}} into multiple additional {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order templates|orders}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you find the {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}} you want to copy, click the {{Button|Split}} button. The screen will display a list of all the order lines. &lt;br /&gt;
* ''TUnit'' - Transport Unit Code.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Product'' - Product Type Code.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Type Description''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Width''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Height''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Length''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Weight''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Quantity''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Volume''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''BaseUE'' - Base Unit Equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Haz''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Stackable''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Include'' - a tick box to indicate that this order line is included in the split.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then indicate how many {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order templates|orders}} to split this into - the default is 2. You can split the order lines selected into new {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order templates|orders}} using the '''Split''' button, or cancel the split with the '''Cancel''' button or by closing the window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Copy an {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|Order Template|Order}} ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can copy an existing {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}} to create a new {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you find the {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}} you want to copy, click the {{Button|Copy}} button. This will create a copy of the {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}} with a new reference, ready for you to amend and save like normal. Note that all details are copied, including lines and items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order section ==&lt;br /&gt;
The header will display the status of the {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}}. This includes:&lt;br /&gt;
* The TMS reference number.&lt;br /&gt;
* The order status.&lt;br /&gt;
* The execution status.&lt;br /&gt;
* Totals:&lt;br /&gt;
** Weight.&lt;br /&gt;
** Volume.&lt;br /&gt;
** BUE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The section includes the following core order fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Entry Date'' and time.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Group'' - a drop-down list of all customer groups created in the system. You can maintain these in the [[Customer Groups]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Organisation'' - a drop-down list of all organisations created in the system. You can maintain these in the [[Organisation]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Code'' - the customer code for the {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}}. You can maintain these in the [[Customer]] screen. You can look up the available customer codes using the {{Button|Lookup}} button to the right of the value entry. The screen will display a pop-up window listing the available values. You can filter the values on the list by typing in the provided filter box and clicking the '''Filter''' button. You can select a value from the list, or cancel the look up by closing the window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Service Level Code'' - a drop-down list of the service levels for the {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}}. You can maintain these in the [[Service Level]] screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== References section ==&lt;br /&gt;
* ''TMS Internal'' - this is displayed for reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collection Booking Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Delivery Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Instructions section ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter general order instructions for the execution of {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|orders created from this order template|the order}} here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location section ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter the details of the {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}} addresses here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The section allows you to enter:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From'' - the address from which you will pick up the goods on {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|orders created from this template|the order}}.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To'' - the address to which you will deliver the goods on {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|orders created from this template|the order}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each address section allows you to enter the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Code'' - the location code. You can maintain locations in the [[Locations]] screen, or you can use the '''View Details''' button provided if you have entered a location, which will open a new tab showing the location information. You can enter a location code directly or use the {{Button|Lookup}} button to the right of the value entry. The screen will display a pop-up window showing all locations configured in the system. You can select a location by clicking on the row or cancel entry by closing the window. You can refresh the order location details from the location code by pressing the {{Button|Refresh}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Address''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Address 2''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Address 3''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Town''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Postcode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Country''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Instructions'' - specific instructions for execution when at this address.&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display the location on a map beneath the address. As the address is entered or modified, the Latitude and Longitude of the address will be calculated and displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When both addresses are entered, the screen will display the following information below the delivery address:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Distance (KM)''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Expected Driving Time''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ContactsSection}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scheduling section ==&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collection Times'' - you can enter the collection window using the date and times provided. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Delivery Times'' - you can enter the collection window using the date and times provided. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the system has any schedule rules configured, the screen will use the organisation, service level and/or customer and zones of the from and to locations to find a compatible schedule rule. If one is found, the system will automatically default the collection and delivery windows for the order based on the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Requirements section ==&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Temperature Type Code'' - a drop-down list of all temperature types configured in the system. You can maintain these in the [[Temperature Type]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Vehicle Type'' - a drop-down list of all vehicle types configured in the system. You can maintain these in the [[Vehicle Types]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Specified Carrier'' - the specific carrier that is required for this {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|order template|order}}. You can maintain these in the [[Carriers]] screen. You can look up the available carrier codes using the {{Button|Lookup}} button to the right of the value entry. The screen will display a pop-up window listing the available values. You can filter the values on the list by typing in the provided filter box and clicking the '''Filter''' button. You can select a value from the list, or cancel the look up by closing the window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can also indicate any special requirements that have been configured for orders in the system. You can configure Order Requirements in the [[Requirements]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following are currently available:&lt;br /&gt;
* Ambient Temp only.&lt;br /&gt;
* Banksman.&lt;br /&gt;
* Dangerous.&lt;br /&gt;
* Detention.&lt;br /&gt;
* Abnormal Load Escort.&lt;br /&gt;
* Moffet.&lt;br /&gt;
* Extra Man Power.&lt;br /&gt;
* Installation at Delivery Location.&lt;br /&gt;
* Two Man Delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enabled a special requirement by clicking it, and disable it by un-clicking it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Transport Unit section ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter the transport units, products or individual items transported on {{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|orders created from this template|this order}} in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a quantity of transport units by clicking the {{Button|New}} button in the section header. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit an existing transport unit by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the {{Button|Edit}} button in the section header. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that, when you select an existing transport unit, if there are any products or items to deliver, these will be shown in a number of tables below the transport units table:&lt;br /&gt;
* Products For Selected Transport Unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Assets For Selected Transport Unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Products For Selected Asset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display a pop-up window to allow you to identify the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Order Reference'' - an optional references against the ordered line.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Transport Unit Code'' - a drop-down list of the transport unit types configured in the system. You can maintain these in the [[Transport Units]] screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Product Type'' - The product type contained by the transport unit. You can maintain these in the [[Product Types]] screen. You can look up the available product types using the {{Button|Lookup}} button under the value entry. The screen will display a pop-up window listing the available values. You can filter the values on the list by typing in the provided filter box and clicking the '''Filter''' button. You can select a value from the list, or cancel the look up by closing the window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description 1''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description 2''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Pack Quantity'' - the pack quantity of the product.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Quantity''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Width'' - defaulted from the transport unit type after you enter the quantity. You can change this here if required.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Height'' - defaulted from the transport unit type after you enter the quantity. You can change this here if required.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Length'' - defaulted from the transport unit type after you enter the quantity. You can change this here if required.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Weight'' - defaulted from the transport unit type after you enter the quantity. You can change this here if required.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Volume'' - defaulted from the transport unit type after you enter the quantity. You can change this here if required.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''BaseUE'' - defaulted from the transport unit type after you enter the quantity. You can change this here if required.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Hazardous'' - a check box indicating whether this contacts hazardous product.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Stackable'' - a check box indicating whether these transport units are stackable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can save the transport unit quantity by clicking the '''Save''' button or cancel entry by closing the window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete an existing transport unit by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the {{Button|Delete}} button in the section header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add specific products to a transport unit by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the '''New Product''' button in the section header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit an existing product by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the {{Button|Edit}} button above the &amp;quot;Products For Selected Transport Unit&amp;quot; table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display a pop-up window to allow you to identify the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Product''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Quantity''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Unit Weight''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Height''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Width''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Length''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Volume''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Unit Factor''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can save the product by clicking the '''Save''' button or cancel entry by closing the window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete an existing product by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the {{Button|Delete}} button above the &amp;quot;Products For Selected Transport Unit&amp;quot; table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add specific assets/identified items to a transport unit by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the '''New Asset''' button in the section header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit an existing asset by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the {{Button|Edit}} button above the &amp;quot;Assets For Selected Transport Unit&amp;quot; table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display a pop-up window to allow you to identify the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Asset ID''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reference''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can save the asset by clicking the '''Save''' button or cancel entry by closing the window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete an existing asset by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the {{Button|Delete}} button above the &amp;quot;Assets For Selected Transport Unit&amp;quot; table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add specific products to an asset by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the '''New Product''' above the &amp;quot;Assets For Selected Transport Unit&amp;quot; table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit an existing product by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the {{Button|Edit}} button above the &amp;quot;Assets For Selected Transport Unit&amp;quot; table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display a pop-up window to allow you to identify the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Product''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Quantity''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Unit Weight''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Height''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Width''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Length''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Volume''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Unit Factor''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can save the product by clicking the '''Save''' button or cancel entry by closing the window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete an existing product by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the {{Button|Delete}} button above the &amp;quot;Assets For Selected Transport Unit&amp;quot; table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finance section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This sections shows a summary of the revenue, cost and margin for the order.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ifeq: {{{Type|}}}|Template|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section also allows you to maintain additional order charges associated to the order, which will generate revenue to the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add an order charge by clicking the {{Button|New}} button in the section header. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit an existing order charge by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the {{Button|Edit}} button in the section header. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display a pop-up window to allow you to identify the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description'' - the description of the charge or service.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Quantity'' - the quantity of this chargeable item or service.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Price'' - the price of this chargeable item or service.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Value'' - the screen calculates this from the quantity and price.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can save the charge quantity by clicking the '''Save''' button or cancel entry by closing the window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete an order charge by selecting the row in the table and then clicking the {{Button|Delete}} button in the section header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trips section ==&lt;br /&gt;
If this order is planned onto any trips, the screen will display the trips onto which it has been planned here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Trip Ref'' - the trip reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Trip Name'' - the trip name. This may also be the route code, if the trip was generated from a fixed route template.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Trunk Trip'' - a check-box, indicating whether the trip is a trunk trip.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Trip Status'' - the trip status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Trip Start'' - the location at which the trip starts.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Load'' - the location at which the order is loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Unload'' - the location at which the order is unloaded.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{NotesSection}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ParametersSection|Order Parameters}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following parameters are currently available:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;th&amp;gt;Label  	&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th&amp;gt;Description       	&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th&amp;gt;Long Description  	&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th&amp;gt;Type	&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th&amp;gt;Values&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Load Location	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Load Location	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Load Location	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;TextBox	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;String&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Order Comment ID	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Order Comment ID	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Order Comment ID	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;TextBox	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;String&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Order Creation Date	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Order Creation Date	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Order Creation Date	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;TextBox	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;String&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Route	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Route	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Route	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;TextBox	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;String&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Salesperson	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Salesperson	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Salesperson	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;TextBox	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;String&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Transport Unit Colour 	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Transport Unit Colour 	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Transport Unit Colour  	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;DropDownList	&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Red,Blue,Green,Yellow&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{AuditTrailSection}}&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Templates]]&amp;lt;templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;params&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;Type&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;aliases&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
			],&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Screen Type&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;What screen type is this being used for: Template, Enquiry or normal (blank)&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;suggestedvalues&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;Template&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;Enquiry&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
			]&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
	},&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Used for Order Details screens. As the screen is identical for Order Template, Order Enquiry and Orders, this template allows the use for all. \n\nUsage:\n\n* {{OrderDetails}} - for the standard orders screen\n* {{OrderDetails|Template}} - for the Order Template screen\n* {{OrderDetails|Enquiry}} - for the Order Enquiry screen&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/templatedata&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_Fleet_Management_Glossary&amp;diff=1374</id>
		<title>CTL Fleet Management Glossary</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_Fleet_Management_Glossary&amp;diff=1374"/>
		<updated>2024-08-28T13:22:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Categorisation&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable apt-searchable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Term	!!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;non-searchable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; |'''Transport Terms'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AI	||In barcode terms, an Application Identifier; some pre-defined characters in a barcode that define the data content rather than the format.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Carrier	||The carrier completing the trip. Can comprise any carrier configured in the system, but normally Home Fleet (usually a carrier per depot), 3rd-party carriers, supplier-/customer-own transport, own collection, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cost Centre	||A part of an organization to which costs may be charged for accounting purposes. For C-TMS, this is used for accounting purposes, and also to generally configure the system.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|C-Portal	||Calidus Portal, Aptean's web-enabled external access system. Also, any electronic internet-based system designed to access functionality for a particular purpose (for example, customer enquiries, supplier activity, track and trace, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cross-Dock	||Also, a specific location at which product is exchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|C-TMS	||Calidus TMS, Aptean's Transport Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Customer	||In 3PL terms, the customer on behalf of which the transport is being operated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DDL	||Drop-down list – a series of pre-designated answers to a particular question on a device, rather than requiring the user to key the answer in in full.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Debrief	||Comprises 2 parts: Stop debrief, where actual arrival and departure times against a trip are entered; Order debrief, where actual product and item quantities are entered; Driver/Trip debrief, where additional information is captured from the driver relating to the trip.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Delivery Types	||This defines the category of the order and is intrinsically linked to revenue and cost tariffs.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Demurrage; Detention	||Any time spent loading, unloading or waiting that is outside contractual obligation in execution of a trip. This usually incurs additional charges.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Depot	||Any location that schedules and controls transport.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Despatch	||In transport terms, the process of loading and despatching items out of a depot. In this implementation, the process of loading and despatching is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Loading.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DMS	||Document Management Systems: Systems than manage the storage and viewing of (predominantly) scanned documents. Usually these systems also include some automation and indexing routines.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DOT	||Delivery on Time – see OTIF.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Driver	||Comprising drivers and crew assigned to a trip.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DU	||Distribution/Deliverable Unit – Pallet, Package, etc.; Also, Asset, Asset Type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EDI	||Electronic Data Interchange – a mechanism by which 2 systems can communicate normally without user intervention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ERP	||Enterprise Resource Planning&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fixed Route Template	||A template in C-TMS that provides a series of timed slots into which orders will fit. This can be used to create fixed routes (q.v.) and also as a template for cross-docking and grouping similar orders together.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fixed Route	||In transport terms, a fixed route is a trip comprised of a series of fixed stops that are typically always visited. A C-TMS fixed route template (q.v.) can be used to create these.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fixed Schedule	||An order that occurs at a fixed time. Differing from the above, the order will be created in the schedule; Also, Milk Run.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Item	||A single item for delivery/collection. A general term, distinct from the DU of the deliverable item e.g. Pallet, Package, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Load	||C-TMS: A trip that encompasses just a vehicle-full of items, or one journey out and back to a depot.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Loading	||In transport terms, the process of loading and despatching items out of a depot. In this implementation, the process of loading and despatching is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Despatch.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Location	||In C-TMS terms, a trip comprises visits or drops to many locations. A location can be of many different types.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Location Types	||Usually one of: Depot, Customer, Delivery/Collection Location, Store, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OBD	||On-Board Diagnostics – an automotive term referring to a vehicle's self-diagnostic and reporting capabilities. Also, CANbus.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OMS Ref	||A unique transport movement ID, referring to a single transport movement request.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OPS13	||Vehicle Checks; Defect Reporting&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Optimisation	||Route Building and Optimisation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Order	||Equiv: OMS Ref; a transport movement.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Order Status	||The lifecycle of an order&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OTIF	||On Time in Full – Metrics to measure successful collection or delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Outbase	||a depot whose purpose is to deliver to final delivery destination within a geographically restricted subsection of the whole catchment area; also, ROC.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Reason Codes	||Of many types: Adjustment, Non-conformance, Order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receipt	||In transport terms, the process of receiving and uploading items into a depot. In this implementation, the process of receipt and unloading is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Unloading.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Region	||Geographical Region. Also, Postal Region.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Resources	||Drivers, Crew, Tractors, Vehicles, Trailers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Route	||A route is a fixed route that is repeated. A Trip is a unique trip, which may be created from a route.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ROC; RDC	||Regional Operating Centre; Regional Distribution Centre; a depot whose purpose is to deliver to final delivery destination within a geographically restricted subsection of the whole catchment area; also, Outbase.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|RPE	||Roll-pallet Equivalent – This is used to estimate volume and therefore capacity of vehicles within C-TMS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Schedule	||A day's plan, usually consisting of 24 hours, not necessarily from midnight to midnight.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Service Levels; Service Types	||Typically used to determine additional services for an order, or a quicker transport service.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Shunt	||A trunk (q.v.) movement between depots using the trunk network, typically of a much shorter length than a trunk movement.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Surcharges	||Any changes applied to an invoice at invoice stage, rather than generated from the order or trip itself. Examples are: Fuel Surcharge/Rebate, Demurrage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tariffs	||Rate Cards, forming the basis of generating trip/carrier costs and order revenue.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|TLM	||Transport Logistics Manager&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tractor	||The driver cab, pulling the trailer.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trailer	||The trailer carrying the goods. Can be several types.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Transport	||Transport operational team&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trip	||C-TMS: A selection of work to be completed, specifically a workload that lasts for an entire shift for a driver.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trip Status	||The lifecycle of a trip&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trunk	||A route between depots, transporting goods usually to be delivered from the destination depot, but any transfer of goods from the original receiving or originating depot in the network to the final delivery depot (the outbase).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|TTM	||Calidus TTM; Track and Trace Module; Aptean's application dedicated to tracking and tracing order events with inputs from several external systems.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Unloading	||The process of receiving and uploading items into a depot. In this implementation, the process of receipt and unloading is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Receiving.&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;non-searchable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; |'''Tyre and Fleet Management Terms'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Casing	||Inner layer of a tyre, below the tread. If not overly damaged, a casing may be repaired and re-treaded rather than scrapped.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DOT code	||Department of Transportation code, uniquely identifying the manufacture place and date of the tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre	||Depot&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tread depth	||The depth of the tread on the tyre. Anything below 6mm is considered in need of replacement.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Regroove	||The action of etching tread deeper into the existing tyre body.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Retread; remould	||The action of refitting more rubber to a tyre body.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|COP	||Customer-own product; product owned by the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Call-out	||A job to travel to a location (either a known customer location or a previously unknown location) to service a vehicle, typically to fit and/or remove a tyre. Rapid call-out jobs and scheduled call-out jobs are largely the same, although rapid call-out jobs typically have a tighter timeframe and are dealt with immediately, whereas scheduled callouts may be for some time in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supply	||Providing tyres to a customer without fitment. This is a standard transport delivery job.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inspection	||The act of inspecting all of the tyres on the vehicle to check for defects, tread depth, pressure, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fleet inspection	||A job to perform inspections on multiple vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ply	||Layers of fabric that cover the whole of the casing, providing structure and strength to the tyre, e.g. radial, cross-ply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Pattern	||The pattern of the tread.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Technician	||The person fitting the tyre. In transport terms, this is the driver of the vehicle executing the jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Templates]][[Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide|998]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_Fleet_Management_Glossary&amp;diff=1373</id>
		<title>CTL Fleet Management Glossary</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_Fleet_Management_Glossary&amp;diff=1373"/>
		<updated>2024-08-28T13:22:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Categorisation&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable apt-searchable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Term	!!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;non-searchable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; |'''Transport Terms'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AI	||In barcode terms, an Application Identifier; some pre-defined characters in a barcode that define the data content rather than the format.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Carrier	||The carrier completing the trip. Can comprise any carrier configured in the system, but normally Home Fleet (usually a carrier per depot), 3rd-party carriers, supplier-/customer-own transport, own collection, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cost Centre	||A part of an organization to which costs may be charged for accounting purposes. For C-TMS, this is used for accounting purposes, and also to generally configure the system.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|C-Portal	||Calidus Portal, Aptean's web-enabled external access system. Also, any electronic internet-based system designed to access functionality for a particular purpose (for example, customer enquiries, supplier activity, track and trace, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cross-Dock	||Also, a specific location at which product is exchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|C-TMS	||Calidus TMS, Aptean's Transport Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Customer	||In 3PL terms, the customer on behalf of which the transport is being operated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DDL	||Drop-down list – a series of pre-designated answers to a particular question on a device, rather than requiring the user to key the answer in in full.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Debrief	||Comprises 2 parts: Stop debrief, where actual arrival and departure times against a trip are entered; Order debrief, where actual product and item quantities are entered; Driver/Trip debrief, where additional information is captured from the driver relating to the trip.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Delivery Types	||This defines the category of the order and is intrinsically linked to revenue and cost tariffs.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Demurrage; Detention	||Any time spent loading, unloading or waiting that is outside contractual obligation in execution of a trip. This usually incurs additional charges.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Depot	||Any location that schedules and controls transport.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Despatch	||In transport terms, the process of loading and despatching items out of a depot. In this implementation, the process of loading and despatching is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Loading.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DMS	||Document Management Systems: Systems than manage the storage and viewing of (predominantly) scanned documents. Usually these systems also include some automation and indexing routines.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DOT	||Delivery on Time – see OTIF.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Driver	||Comprising drivers and crew assigned to a trip.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DU	||Distribution/Deliverable Unit – Pallet, Package, etc.; Also, Asset, Asset Type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EDI	||Electronic Data Interchange – a mechanism by which 2 systems can communicate normally without user intervention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ERP	||Enterprise Resource Planning&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fixed Route Template	||A template in C-TMS that provides a series of timed slots into which orders will fit. This can be used to create fixed routes (q.v.) and also as a template for cross-docking and grouping similar orders together.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fixed Route	||In transport terms, a fixed route is a trip comprised of a series of fixed stops that are typically always visited. A C-TMS fixed route template (q.v.) can be used to create these.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fixed Schedule	||An order that occurs at a fixed time. Differing from the above, the order will be created in the schedule; Also, Milk Run.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Item	||A single item for delivery/collection. A general term, distinct from the DU of the deliverable item e.g. Pallet, Package, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Load	||C-TMS: A trip that encompasses just a vehicle-full of items, or one journey out and back to a depot.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Loading	||In transport terms, the process of loading and despatching items out of a depot. In this implementation, the process of loading and despatching is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Despatch.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Location	||In C-TMS terms, a trip comprises visits or drops to many locations. A location can be of many different types.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Location Types	||Usually one of: Depot, Customer, Delivery/Collection Location, Store, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OBD	||On-Board Diagnostics – an automotive term referring to a vehicle's self-diagnostic and reporting capabilities. Also, CANbus.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OMS Ref	||A unique transport movement ID, referring to a single transport movement request.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OPS13	||Vehicle Checks; Defect Reporting&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Optimisation	||Route Building and Optimisation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Order	||Equiv: OMS Ref; a transport movement.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Order Status	||The lifecycle of an order&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OTIF	||On Time in Full – Metrics to measure successful collection or delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Outbase	||a depot whose purpose is to deliver to final delivery destination within a geographically restricted subsection of the whole catchment area; also, ROC.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Reason Codes	||Of many types: Adjustment, Non-conformance, Order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receipt	||In transport terms, the process of receiving and uploading items into a depot. In this implementation, the process of receipt and unloading is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Unloading.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Region	||Geographical Region. Also, Postal Region.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Resources	||Drivers, Crew, Tractors, Vehicles, Trailers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Route	||A route is a fixed route that is repeated. A Trip is a unique trip, which may be created from a route.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ROC; RDC	||Regional Operating Centre; Regional Distribution Centre; a depot whose purpose is to deliver to final delivery destination within a geographically restricted subsection of the whole catchment area; also, Outbase.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|RPE	||Roll-pallet Equivalent – This is used to estimate volume and therefore capacity of vehicles within C-TMS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Schedule	||A day's plan, usually consisting of 24 hours, not necessarily from midnight to midnight.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Service Levels; Service Types	||Typically used to determine additional services for an order, or a quicker transport service.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Shunt	||A trunk (q.v.) movement between depots using the trunk network, typically of a much shorter length than a trunk movement.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Surcharges	||Any changes applied to an invoice at invoice stage, rather than generated from the order or trip itself. Examples are: Fuel Surcharge/Rebate, Demurrage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tariffs	||Rate Cards, forming the basis of generating trip/carrier costs and order revenue.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|TLM	||Transport Logistics Manager&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tractor	||The driver cab, pulling the trailer.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trailer	||The trailer carrying the goods. Can be several types.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Transport	||Transport operational team&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trip	||C-TMS: A selection of work to be completed, specifically a workload that lasts for an entire shift for a driver.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trip Status	||The lifecycle of a trip&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trunk	||A route between depots, transporting goods usually to be delivered from the destination depot, but any transfer of goods from the original receiving or originating depot in the network to the final delivery depot (the outbase).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|TTM	||Calidus TTM; Track and Trace Module; Aptean's application dedicated to tracking and tracing order events with inputs from several external systems.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Unloading	||The process of receiving and uploading items into a depot. In this implementation, the process of receipt and unloading is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Receiving.&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;non-searchable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; |'''Tyre and Fleet Management Terms'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Casing	||Inner layer of a tyre, below the tread. If not overly damaged, a casing may be repaired and re-treaded rather than scrapped.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DOT code	||Department of Transportation code, uniquely identifying the manufacture place and date of the tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre	||Depot&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tread depth	||The depth of the tread on the tyre. Anything below 6mm is considered in need of replacement.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Regroove	||The action of etching tread deeper into the existing tyre body.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Retread; remould	||The action of refitting more rubber to a tyre body.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|COP	||Customer-own product; product owned by the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Call-out	||A job to travel to a location (either a known customer location or a previously unknown location) to service a vehicle, typically to fit and/or remove a tyre. Rapid call-out jobs and scheduled call-out jobs are largely the same, although rapid call-out jobs typically have a tighter timeframe and are dealt with immediately, whereas scheduled callouts may be for some time in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supply	||Providing tyres to a customer without fitment. This is a standard transport delivery job.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inspection	||The act of inspecting all of the tyres on the vehicle to check for defects, tread depth, pressure, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fleet inspection	||A job to perform inspections on multiple vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ply	||Layers of fabric that cover the whole of the casing, providing structure and strength to the tyre, e.g. radial, cross-ply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Pattern	||The pattern of the tread.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Technician	||The person fitting the tyre. In transport terms, this is the driver of the vehicle executing the jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Templates]][[Categidy:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide|998]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1372</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1372"/>
		<updated>2024-08-28T13:21:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Minor correction&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[File:calidus-total-logistics.png]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Welcome to the ''CALIDUS'' Total Logistics Assist TMS (CTL-TMS) home page.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you will find all kind of guides, from simple to advanced, from user guides to technical implementation guides, all to provide as much information on how to get the best out your ''CALIDUS'' Total Logistics TMS implementation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assuming you are now up and running with your system, why not try to find something you didn't know? Try clicking the 'Did You Know' link below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Did You Know]]&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That's how Assist works - help broken down into bite-size chunks, designed to help you make the most of your system. If you're familiar with the web, and familiar with Wiki, you're going to find it easy to get around in Assist. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're coming here as a new user without a clear idea of how ''CALIDUS'' Total Logistics TMS works or what it does, you should start with the overview and glossary of terms - that will give you enough information so that you're clear on what we're achieving with this application. You'll find them first in the list below [[#General|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're more comfortable with documents rather than web pages, we've got you covered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every page here can be downloaded as a PDF (including this one) by clicking the ''Download as PDF'' link in the toolbar, typically on the left of your browser window. That will give you the PDF of just that page, but if you want something more formal, we also produce these are controlled documents. On this page, we've also provided direct links to those document versions - click the {{DocLink|Main Page}} link next to the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see, some of the guides are multi-page, so we organise those into categories of pages. Where those pages form a guide themselves (like the Admin User Guide), you can use that ''Download as PDF'' link again from the category to get all of the pages in one handy guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We keep these pages up to date based on the latest available version of ''CALIDUS'' Total Logistics TMS - if you see something you like here, but aren't sure whether your version supports it, why not give our team a call? We can advise you of the steps you need to take to upgrade your system to the latest and greatest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We're constantly updating the system, and that means that we're constantly updating the documentation too. One of the great things about Wiki pages is that that history is kept, so you can click the ''View History'' link (usually at the top of the page) to see all previous versions of the help page. So, although all the guides are the latest version, you can still get at the older pages for reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same is true of any of the pictures that we've uploaded in these guides - click on them and you can see the whole history of that picture. You can download them as well, if you like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, we also keep PDF copies of the previous version of the documentation when we've finished it, so we can always provide them to you. We've generated them from these Assist pages just like you can - because it's that easy to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below you'll find a link to the beginning of all of the guides in this Assist system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General  ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Overview]] - an overview of the system in general.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[CTL Fleet Management Glossary]] - a glossary of terms used in the guides and the system.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Glossary]] - a glossary of terms used in the guides and the system.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[General Screen Usage]]  - a guide to how screens generally work within CTL.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Section Templates|Detail Sections]] - most screens have details that can be seen when clicking on a record. There are sections specific to that type of record and common sections that appear when this is displayed. This link shows you the usage of common sections.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Did You Know]] - a short guide to features that you may have missed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== C-TL Key Functionality  ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Initial Setup]] - a guide on setting up C-TL for a new contract. &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Schedules]]  - a guide on schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Orders]] - a guide on orders.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Planning]] - a guide on planning.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Call Logging - Tyres]] - a guide on Call Logging.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Customer Service]] - a guide to Customer Service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Full CTL Reference Guide  ==&lt;br /&gt;
This is the Main Page, showing all sections of the reference guide: [[:Category:UG 331692 CTL-TMS Reference Guide]] {{DocLink|Category:UG 331692 CTL-TMS Reference Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each individual section is listed below: &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Home]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Maintenance]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Parameter Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Organisation Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Geographical Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Base Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Product Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Vehicle Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Resource Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Finance Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Service Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Order Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Planning]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Enquiries]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CTL Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide  ==&lt;br /&gt;
This is the Main Page, showing all sections of the reference guide: &lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide]] {{DocLink|Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
*[[CTL Fleet Management Glossary]] - a glossary of terms used in the guides and the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Coming Soon ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains guides that are in progress. Typically, they might be incomplete or less detailed than needed.&lt;br /&gt;
We'll link our new guides here, whether we've finished them or not. That way you can see what's around the corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Program and Menu Administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Asset Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We also categorise any pages that are considered incomplete. These pages may not be listed above, as they are not new or upcoming guides, but they generally need a little more work to get them to their full potential. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find the list here:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Incomplete|Incomplete Pages]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently, the following screens are missing screenshots and will be added soon:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Charges]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Contract Type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Contracts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Payment Method]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Rate Cards]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Supplier]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Carrier Parameters]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Resource Type Parameters]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[UDF Parameters]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Assets]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Asset Locations]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Asset Adjustments]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Customer Service]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New Users  ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} For new users of ''CALIDUS'' Assist: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the [[Special:Preferences|My Preferences]] link and click on the Editing tab. Check the &amp;quot;Prompt me when entering a blank edit summary&amp;quot; check box and save the settings.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_Fleet_Management_Glossary&amp;diff=1371</id>
		<title>CTL Fleet Management Glossary</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_Fleet_Management_Glossary&amp;diff=1371"/>
		<updated>2024-08-28T13:19:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Categorisation&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable apt-searchable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Term	!!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;non-searchable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; |'''Transport Terms'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AI	||In barcode terms, an Application Identifier; some pre-defined characters in a barcode that define the data content rather than the format.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Carrier	||The carrier completing the trip. Can comprise any carrier configured in the system, but normally Home Fleet (usually a carrier per depot), 3rd-party carriers, supplier-/customer-own transport, own collection, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cost Centre	||A part of an organization to which costs may be charged for accounting purposes. For C-TMS, this is used for accounting purposes, and also to generally configure the system.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|C-Portal	||Calidus Portal, Aptean's web-enabled external access system. Also, any electronic internet-based system designed to access functionality for a particular purpose (for example, customer enquiries, supplier activity, track and trace, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cross-Dock	||Also, a specific location at which product is exchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|C-TMS	||Calidus TMS, Aptean's Transport Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Customer	||In 3PL terms, the customer on behalf of which the transport is being operated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DDL	||Drop-down list – a series of pre-designated answers to a particular question on a device, rather than requiring the user to key the answer in in full.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Debrief	||Comprises 2 parts: Stop debrief, where actual arrival and departure times against a trip are entered; Order debrief, where actual product and item quantities are entered; Driver/Trip debrief, where additional information is captured from the driver relating to the trip.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Delivery Types	||This defines the category of the order and is intrinsically linked to revenue and cost tariffs.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Demurrage; Detention	||Any time spent loading, unloading or waiting that is outside contractual obligation in execution of a trip. This usually incurs additional charges.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Depot	||Any location that schedules and controls transport.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Despatch	||In transport terms, the process of loading and despatching items out of a depot. In this implementation, the process of loading and despatching is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Loading.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DMS	||Document Management Systems: Systems than manage the storage and viewing of (predominantly) scanned documents. Usually these systems also include some automation and indexing routines.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DOT	||Delivery on Time – see OTIF.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Driver	||Comprising drivers and crew assigned to a trip.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DU	||Distribution/Deliverable Unit – Pallet, Package, etc.; Also, Asset, Asset Type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EDI	||Electronic Data Interchange – a mechanism by which 2 systems can communicate normally without user intervention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ERP	||Enterprise Resource Planning&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fixed Route Template	||A template in C-TMS that provides a series of timed slots into which orders will fit. This can be used to create fixed routes (q.v.) and also as a template for cross-docking and grouping similar orders together.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fixed Route	||In transport terms, a fixed route is a trip comprised of a series of fixed stops that are typically always visited. A C-TMS fixed route template (q.v.) can be used to create these.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fixed Schedule	||An order that occurs at a fixed time. Differing from the above, the order will be created in the schedule; Also, Milk Run.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Item	||A single item for delivery/collection. A general term, distinct from the DU of the deliverable item e.g. Pallet, Package, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Load	||C-TMS: A trip that encompasses just a vehicle-full of items, or one journey out and back to a depot.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Loading	||In transport terms, the process of loading and despatching items out of a depot. In this implementation, the process of loading and despatching is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Despatch.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Location	||In C-TMS terms, a trip comprises visits or drops to many locations. A location can be of many different types.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Location Types	||Usually one of: Depot, Customer, Delivery/Collection Location, Store, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OBD	||On-Board Diagnostics – an automotive term referring to a vehicle's self-diagnostic and reporting capabilities. Also, CANbus.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OMS Ref	||A unique transport movement ID, referring to a single transport movement request.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OPS13	||Vehicle Checks; Defect Reporting&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Optimisation	||Route Building and Optimisation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Order	||Equiv: OMS Ref; a transport movement.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Order Status	||The lifecycle of an order&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OTIF	||On Time in Full – Metrics to measure successful collection or delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Outbase	||a depot whose purpose is to deliver to final delivery destination within a geographically restricted subsection of the whole catchment area; also, ROC.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Reason Codes	||Of many types: Adjustment, Non-conformance, Order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receipt	||In transport terms, the process of receiving and uploading items into a depot. In this implementation, the process of receipt and unloading is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Unloading.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Region	||Geographical Region. Also, Postal Region.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Resources	||Drivers, Crew, Tractors, Vehicles, Trailers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Route	||A route is a fixed route that is repeated. A Trip is a unique trip, which may be created from a route.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ROC; RDC	||Regional Operating Centre; Regional Distribution Centre; a depot whose purpose is to deliver to final delivery destination within a geographically restricted subsection of the whole catchment area; also, Outbase.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|RPE	||Roll-pallet Equivalent – This is used to estimate volume and therefore capacity of vehicles within C-TMS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Schedule	||A day's plan, usually consisting of 24 hours, not necessarily from midnight to midnight.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Service Levels; Service Types	||Typically used to determine additional services for an order, or a quicker transport service.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Shunt	||A trunk (q.v.) movement between depots using the trunk network, typically of a much shorter length than a trunk movement.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Surcharges	||Any changes applied to an invoice at invoice stage, rather than generated from the order or trip itself. Examples are: Fuel Surcharge/Rebate, Demurrage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tariffs	||Rate Cards, forming the basis of generating trip/carrier costs and order revenue.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|TLM	||Transport Logistics Manager&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tractor	||The driver cab, pulling the trailer.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trailer	||The trailer carrying the goods. Can be several types.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Transport	||Transport operational team&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trip	||C-TMS: A selection of work to be completed, specifically a workload that lasts for an entire shift for a driver.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trip Status	||The lifecycle of a trip&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trunk	||A route between depots, transporting goods usually to be delivered from the destination depot, but any transfer of goods from the original receiving or originating depot in the network to the final delivery depot (the outbase).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|TTM	||Calidus TTM; Track and Trace Module; Aptean's application dedicated to tracking and tracing order events with inputs from several external systems.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Unloading	||The process of receiving and uploading items into a depot. In this implementation, the process of receipt and unloading is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Receiving.&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;non-searchable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; |'''Tyre and Fleet Management Terms'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Casing	||Inner layer of a tyre, below the tread. If not overly damaged, a casing may be repaired and re-treaded rather than scrapped.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DOT code	||Department of Transportation code, uniquely identifying the manufacture place and date of the tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre	||Depot&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tread depth	||The depth of the tread on the tyre. Anything below 6mm is considered in need of replacement.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Regroove	||The action of etching tread deeper into the existing tyre body.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Retread; remould	||The action of refitting more rubber to a tyre body.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|COP	||Customer-own product; product owned by the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Call-out	||A job to travel to a location (either a known customer location or a previously unknown location) to service a vehicle, typically to fit and/or remove a tyre. Rapid call-out jobs and scheduled call-out jobs are largely the same, although rapid call-out jobs typically have a tighter timeframe and are dealt with immediately, whereas scheduled callouts may be for some time in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supply	||Providing tyres to a customer without fitment. This is a standard transport delivery job.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inspection	||The act of inspecting all of the tyres on the vehicle to check for defects, tread depth, pressure, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fleet inspection	||A job to perform inspections on multiple vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ply	||Layers of fabric that cover the whole of the casing, providing structure and strength to the tyre, e.g. radial, cross-ply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Pattern	||The pattern of the tread.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Technician	||The person fitting the tyre. In transport terms, this is the driver of the vehicle executing the jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Templates]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1370</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1370"/>
		<updated>2024-08-28T13:18:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Minor correction&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[File:calidus-total-logistics.png]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Welcome to the ''CALIDUS'' Total Logistics Assist TMS (CTL-TMS) home page.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you will find all kind of guides, from simple to advanced, from user guides to technical implementation guides, all to provide as much information on how to get the best out your ''CALIDUS'' Total Logistics TMS implementation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assuming you are now up and running with your system, why not try to find something you didn't know? Try clicking the 'Did You Know' link below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Did You Know]]&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That's how Assist works - help broken down into bite-size chunks, designed to help you make the most of your system. If you're familiar with the web, and familiar with Wiki, you're going to find it easy to get around in Assist. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're coming here as a new user without a clear idea of how ''CALIDUS'' Total Logistics TMS works or what it does, you should start with the overview and glossary of terms - that will give you enough information so that you're clear on what we're achieving with this application. You'll find them first in the list below [[#General|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're more comfortable with documents rather than web pages, we've got you covered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every page here can be downloaded as a PDF (including this one) by clicking the ''Download as PDF'' link in the toolbar, typically on the left of your browser window. That will give you the PDF of just that page, but if you want something more formal, we also produce these are controlled documents. On this page, we've also provided direct links to those document versions - click the {{DocLink|Main Page}} link next to the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see, some of the guides are multi-page, so we organise those into categories of pages. Where those pages form a guide themselves (like the Admin User Guide), you can use that ''Download as PDF'' link again from the category to get all of the pages in one handy guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We keep these pages up to date based on the latest available version of ''CALIDUS'' Total Logistics TMS - if you see something you like here, but aren't sure whether your version supports it, why not give our team a call? We can advise you of the steps you need to take to upgrade your system to the latest and greatest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We're constantly updating the system, and that means that we're constantly updating the documentation too. One of the great things about Wiki pages is that that history is kept, so you can click the ''View History'' link (usually at the top of the page) to see all previous versions of the help page. So, although all the guides are the latest version, you can still get at the older pages for reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same is true of any of the pictures that we've uploaded in these guides - click on them and you can see the whole history of that picture. You can download them as well, if you like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, we also keep PDF copies of the previous version of the documentation when we've finished it, so we can always provide them to you. We've generated them from these Assist pages just like you can - because it's that easy to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below you'll find a link to the beginning of all of the guides in this Assist system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General  ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Overview]] - an overview of the system in general.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[CTL Fleet Management Glossary]] - a glossary of terms used in the guides and the system.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Glossary]] - a glossary of terms used in the guides and the system.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[General Screen Usage]]  - a guide to how screens generally work within CTL.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Section Templates|Detail Sections]] - most screens have details that can be seen when clicking on a record. There are sections specific to that type of record and common sections that appear when this is displayed. This link shows you the usage of common sections.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Did You Know]] - a short guide to features that you may have missed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== C-TL Key Functionality  ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Initial Setup]] - a guide on setting up C-TL for a new contract. &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Schedules]]  - a guide on schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Orders]] - a guide on orders.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Planning]] - a guide on planning.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Call Logging - Tyres]] - a guide on Call Logging.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Customer Service]] - a guide to Customer Service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Full CTL Reference Guide  ==&lt;br /&gt;
This is the Main Page, showing all sections of the reference guide: [[:Category:UG 331692 CTL-TMS Reference Guide]] {{DocLink|Category:UG 331692 CTL-TMS Reference Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each individual section is listed below: &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Home]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Maintenance]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Parameter Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Organisation Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Geographical Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Base Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Product Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Vehicle Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Resource Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Finance Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Service Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[:Category:Order Data]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Planning]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Enquiries]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CTL Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide  ==&lt;br /&gt;
This is the Main Page, showing all sections of the reference guide: &lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide]] {{DocLink|Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Glossary]] - a glossary of terms used in the guides and the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Coming Soon ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains guides that are in progress. Typically, they might be incomplete or less detailed than needed.&lt;br /&gt;
We'll link our new guides here, whether we've finished them or not. That way you can see what's around the corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Program and Menu Administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Asset Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We also categorise any pages that are considered incomplete. These pages may not be listed above, as they are not new or upcoming guides, but they generally need a little more work to get them to their full potential. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find the list here:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Incomplete|Incomplete Pages]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently, the following screens are missing screenshots and will be added soon:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Charges]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Contract Type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Contracts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Payment Method]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Rate Cards]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Supplier]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Carrier Parameters]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Resource Type Parameters]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[UDF Parameters]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Assets]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Asset Locations]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Asset Adjustments]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Customer Service]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New Users  ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} For new users of ''CALIDUS'' Assist: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the [[Special:Preferences|My Preferences]] link and click on the Editing tab. Check the &amp;quot;Prompt me when entering a blank edit summary&amp;quot; check box and save the settings.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_Fleet_Management_Glossary&amp;diff=1369</id>
		<title>CTL Fleet Management Glossary</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_Fleet_Management_Glossary&amp;diff=1369"/>
		<updated>2024-08-28T13:16:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Initial Creation&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable apt-searchable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Term	!!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;non-searchable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; |'''Transport Terms'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AI	||In barcode terms, an Application Identifier; some pre-defined characters in a barcode that define the data content rather than the format.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Carrier	||The carrier completing the trip. Can comprise any carrier configured in the system, but normally Home Fleet (usually a carrier per depot), 3rd-party carriers, supplier-/customer-own transport, own collection, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cost Centre	||A part of an organization to which costs may be charged for accounting purposes. For C-TMS, this is used for accounting purposes, and also to generally configure the system.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|C-Portal	||Calidus Portal, Aptean's web-enabled external access system. Also, any electronic internet-based system designed to access functionality for a particular purpose (for example, customer enquiries, supplier activity, track and trace, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cross-Dock	||Also, a specific location at which product is exchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|C-TMS	||Calidus TMS, Aptean's Transport Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Customer	||In 3PL terms, the customer on behalf of which the transport is being operated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DDL	||Drop-down list – a series of pre-designated answers to a particular question on a device, rather than requiring the user to key the answer in in full.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Debrief	||Comprises 2 parts: Stop debrief, where actual arrival and departure times against a trip are entered; Order debrief, where actual product and item quantities are entered; Driver/Trip debrief, where additional information is captured from the driver relating to the trip.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Delivery Types	||This defines the category of the order and is intrinsically linked to revenue and cost tariffs.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Demurrage; Detention	||Any time spent loading, unloading or waiting that is outside contractual obligation in execution of a trip. This usually incurs additional charges.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Depot	||Any location that schedules and controls transport.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Despatch	||In transport terms, the process of loading and despatching items out of a depot. In this implementation, the process of loading and despatching is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Loading.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DMS	||Document Management Systems: Systems than manage the storage and viewing of (predominantly) scanned documents. Usually these systems also include some automation and indexing routines.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DOT	||Delivery on Time – see OTIF.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Driver	||Comprising drivers and crew assigned to a trip.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DU	||Distribution/Deliverable Unit – Pallet, Package, etc.; Also, Asset, Asset Type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|EDI	||Electronic Data Interchange – a mechanism by which 2 systems can communicate normally without user intervention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ERP	||Enterprise Resource Planning&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fixed Route Template	||A template in C-TMS that provides a series of timed slots into which orders will fit. This can be used to create fixed routes (q.v.) and also as a template for cross-docking and grouping similar orders together.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fixed Route	||In transport terms, a fixed route is a trip comprised of a series of fixed stops that are typically always visited. A C-TMS fixed route template (q.v.) can be used to create these.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fixed Schedule	||An order that occurs at a fixed time. Differing from the above, the order will be created in the schedule; Also, Milk Run.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Item	||A single item for delivery/collection. A general term, distinct from the DU of the deliverable item e.g. Pallet, Package, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Load	||C-TMS: A trip that encompasses just a vehicle-full of items, or one journey out and back to a depot.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Loading	||In transport terms, the process of loading and despatching items out of a depot. In this implementation, the process of loading and despatching is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Despatch.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Location	||In C-TMS terms, a trip comprises visits or drops to many locations. A location can be of many different types.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Location Types	||Usually one of: Depot, Customer, Delivery/Collection Location, Store, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OBD	||On-Board Diagnostics – an automotive term referring to a vehicle's self-diagnostic and reporting capabilities. Also, CANbus.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OMS Ref	||A unique transport movement ID, referring to a single transport movement request.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OPS13	||Vehicle Checks; Defect Reporting&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Optimisation	||Route Building and Optimisation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Order	||Equiv: OMS Ref; a transport movement.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Order Status	||The lifecycle of an order&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|OTIF	||On Time in Full – Metrics to measure successful collection or delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Outbase	||a depot whose purpose is to deliver to final delivery destination within a geographically restricted subsection of the whole catchment area; also, ROC.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Reason Codes	||Of many types: Adjustment, Non-conformance, Order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receipt	||In transport terms, the process of receiving and uploading items into a depot. In this implementation, the process of receipt and unloading is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Unloading.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Region	||Geographical Region. Also, Postal Region.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Resources	||Drivers, Crew, Tractors, Vehicles, Trailers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Route	||A route is a fixed route that is repeated. A Trip is a unique trip, which may be created from a route.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|ROC; RDC	||Regional Operating Centre; Regional Distribution Centre; a depot whose purpose is to deliver to final delivery destination within a geographically restricted subsection of the whole catchment area; also, Outbase.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|RPE	||Roll-pallet Equivalent – This is used to estimate volume and therefore capacity of vehicles within C-TMS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Schedule	||A day's plan, usually consisting of 24 hours, not necessarily from midnight to midnight.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Service Levels; Service Types	||Typically used to determine additional services for an order, or a quicker transport service.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Shunt	||A trunk (q.v.) movement between depots using the trunk network, typically of a much shorter length than a trunk movement.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Surcharges	||Any changes applied to an invoice at invoice stage, rather than generated from the order or trip itself. Examples are: Fuel Surcharge/Rebate, Demurrage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tariffs	||Rate Cards, forming the basis of generating trip/carrier costs and order revenue.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|TLM	||Transport Logistics Manager&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tractor	||The driver cab, pulling the trailer.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trailer	||The trailer carrying the goods. Can be several types.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Transport	||Transport operational team&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trip	||C-TMS: A selection of work to be completed, specifically a workload that lasts for an entire shift for a driver.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trip Status	||The lifecycle of a trip&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trunk	||A route between depots, transporting goods usually to be delivered from the destination depot, but any transfer of goods from the original receiving or originating depot in the network to the final delivery depot (the outbase).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|TTM	||Calidus TTM; Track and Trace Module; Aptean's application dedicated to tracking and tracing order events with inputs from several external systems.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Unloading	||The process of receiving and uploading items into a depot. In this implementation, the process of receipt and unloading is predominantly controlled by C-MCS (q.v.). See also Receiving.&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;non-searchable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; |'''Tyre and Fleet Management Terms'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Casing	||Inner layer of a tyre, below the tread. If not overly damaged, a casing may be repaired and re-treaded rather than scrapped.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DOT code	||Department of Transportation code, uniquely identifying the manufacture place and date of the tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre	||Depot&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tread depth	||The depth of the tread on the tyre. Anything below 6mm is considered in need of replacement.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Regroove	||The action of etching tread deeper into the existing tyre body.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Retread; remould	||The action of refitting more rubber to a tyre body.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|COP	||Customer-own product; product owned by the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Call-out	||A job to travel to a location (either a known customer location or a previously unknown location) to service a vehicle, typically to fit and/or remove a tyre. Rapid call-out jobs and scheduled call-out jobs are largely the same, although rapid call-out jobs typically have a tighter timeframe and are dealt with immediately, whereas scheduled callouts may be for some time in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supply	||Providing tyres to a customer without fitment. This is a standard transport delivery job.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Inspection	||The act of inspecting all of the tyres on the vehicle to check for defects, tread depth, pressure, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fleet inspection	||A job to perform inspections on multiple vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ply	||Layers of fabric that cover the whole of the casing, providing structure and strength to the tyre, e.g. radial, cross-ply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Pattern	||The pattern of the tread.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Technician	||The person fitting the tyre. In transport terms, this is the driver of the vehicle executing the jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Templates]][[Category:Glossaries]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Note&amp;diff=1368</id>
		<title>Template:Note</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Note&amp;diff=1368"/>
		<updated>2024-08-28T08:27:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Minor formatting change&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;{{#if: {{{1|}}}|&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;block-note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;block-contents&amp;quot;&amp;gt;|}}[[Image:Bulbgraph.png|18px|Note|link=]] '''Note:''' {{#if: {{{1|}}}|{{{1}}}&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The following displays the noteicon and the word 'Note:'.  You can follow this with whatever text/images/markup you like. {{note}} Try this!. Alternatively, you can pass the warning text as the parameter, for example {{Note|Try this!}}.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;params&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Text to be included&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Note text to be displayed in-line and indented.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
	},&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;paramOrder&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
	]&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Templates|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Common.js&amp;diff=1367</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Common.js</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Common.js&amp;diff=1367"/>
		<updated>2024-08-28T07:55:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Added autofocus back to search when clearing table searches&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;/* Any JavaScript here will be loaded for all users on every page load. */&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
// Javascript/jQuery code for searching tables&lt;br /&gt;
function search_table(tableID, value){  &lt;br /&gt;
	$('#'+tableID+' tr').each(function(){  &lt;br /&gt;
		 var found = 'false';  &lt;br /&gt;
		 if (!$(this).hasClass('non-searchable')) {&lt;br /&gt;
			 $(this).each(function(){  &lt;br /&gt;
				if ($(this).find('td.non-searchable').length &amp;gt; 0) {&lt;br /&gt;
					   found = 'true';  &lt;br /&gt;
				} else if (!$(this).find('th').length &amp;gt; 0) {&lt;br /&gt;
				  if($(this).text().toLowerCase().indexOf(value.toLowerCase()) &amp;gt;= 0)  &lt;br /&gt;
				  {  &lt;br /&gt;
					   found = 'true';  &lt;br /&gt;
				  }&lt;br /&gt;
				} else {&lt;br /&gt;
					// Always keep the header row&lt;br /&gt;
					found = 'true';&lt;br /&gt;
				}&lt;br /&gt;
			 });  &lt;br /&gt;
			 if(found == 'true')  &lt;br /&gt;
			 {  &lt;br /&gt;
				  $(this).show();  &lt;br /&gt;
			 }  &lt;br /&gt;
			 else  &lt;br /&gt;
			 {  &lt;br /&gt;
				  $(this).hide();  &lt;br /&gt;
			 }  &lt;br /&gt;
		 }&lt;br /&gt;
	});  &lt;br /&gt;
}  &lt;br /&gt;
$(document).ready(function(){&lt;br /&gt;
// Alternative method - makes all tables with 10 or more rows (including header) searchable automatically&lt;br /&gt;
//	$(&amp;quot;table &amp;gt; tbody &amp;gt; tr:nth-child(10)&amp;quot;).closest(&amp;quot;table&amp;quot;).each(function(index, element) {&lt;br /&gt;
	$(&amp;quot;table.apt-searchable&amp;quot;).each(function(index, element) {&lt;br /&gt;
		var tableID = this.id;&lt;br /&gt;
		if (tableID == '') {&lt;br /&gt;
			tableID = &amp;quot;aptSearchableTable_&amp;quot; + (index + 1);&lt;br /&gt;
			$(this).attr(&amp;quot;id&amp;quot;, tableID);&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
		$('&amp;lt;input type=&amp;quot;text&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;'+tableID+'_'+index+'&amp;quot; onkeyup=&amp;quot;search_table(\''+tableID+'\',$(this).val())&amp;quot; placeholder=&amp;quot;Search the table...&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;input type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;$(\'#'+tableID+'_'+index+'\').val(\'\');search_table(\''+tableID+'\',\'\');$(\'#'+tableID+'_'+index+'\').focus();&amp;quot; title=&amp;quot;Clear Entry&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;apt-search-clear&amp;quot;&amp;gt;').insertBefore($(this));&lt;br /&gt;
	});&lt;br /&gt;
});&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTLTMS:Copyrights&amp;diff=1366</id>
		<title>CTLTMS:Copyrights</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTLTMS:Copyrights&amp;diff=1366"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T16:46:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Initial Creation&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Content ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{:{{NAMESPACE}}:General_disclaimer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MediaWiki ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can find the MediaWiki license, contributors, FOSS attributions and components here: &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Special:Version]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Common.js&amp;diff=1365</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Common.js</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Common.js&amp;diff=1365"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:06:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Added searchable tables&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;/* Any JavaScript here will be loaded for all users on every page load. */&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
// Javascript/jQuery code for searching tables&lt;br /&gt;
function search_table(tableID, value){  &lt;br /&gt;
	$('#'+tableID+' tr').each(function(){  &lt;br /&gt;
		 var found = 'false';  &lt;br /&gt;
		 if (!$(this).hasClass('non-searchable')) {&lt;br /&gt;
			 $(this).each(function(){  &lt;br /&gt;
				if ($(this).find('td.non-searchable').length &amp;gt; 0) {&lt;br /&gt;
					   found = 'true';  &lt;br /&gt;
				} else if (!$(this).find('th').length &amp;gt; 0) {&lt;br /&gt;
				  if($(this).text().toLowerCase().indexOf(value.toLowerCase()) &amp;gt;= 0)  &lt;br /&gt;
				  {  &lt;br /&gt;
					   found = 'true';  &lt;br /&gt;
				  }&lt;br /&gt;
				} else {&lt;br /&gt;
					// Always keep the header row&lt;br /&gt;
					found = 'true';&lt;br /&gt;
				}&lt;br /&gt;
			 });  &lt;br /&gt;
			 if(found == 'true')  &lt;br /&gt;
			 {  &lt;br /&gt;
				  $(this).show();  &lt;br /&gt;
			 }  &lt;br /&gt;
			 else  &lt;br /&gt;
			 {  &lt;br /&gt;
				  $(this).hide();  &lt;br /&gt;
			 }  &lt;br /&gt;
		 }&lt;br /&gt;
	});  &lt;br /&gt;
}  &lt;br /&gt;
$(document).ready(function(){&lt;br /&gt;
// Alternative method - makes all tables with 10 or more rows (including header) searchable automatically&lt;br /&gt;
//	$(&amp;quot;table &amp;gt; tbody &amp;gt; tr:nth-child(10)&amp;quot;).closest(&amp;quot;table&amp;quot;).each(function(index, element) {&lt;br /&gt;
	$(&amp;quot;table.apt-searchable&amp;quot;).each(function(index, element) {&lt;br /&gt;
		var tableID = this.id;&lt;br /&gt;
		if (tableID == '') {&lt;br /&gt;
			tableID = &amp;quot;aptSearchableTable_&amp;quot; + (index + 1);&lt;br /&gt;
			$(this).attr(&amp;quot;id&amp;quot;, tableID);&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
		$('&amp;lt;input type=&amp;quot;text&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;'+tableID+'_'+index+'&amp;quot; onkeyup=&amp;quot;search_table(\''+tableID+'\',$(this).val())&amp;quot; placeholder=&amp;quot;Search the table...&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;input type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;$(\'#'+tableID+'_'+index+'\').val(\'\');search_table(\''+tableID+'\',\'\')&amp;quot; title=&amp;quot;Clear Entry&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;apt-search-clear&amp;quot;&amp;gt;').insertBefore($(this));&lt;br /&gt;
	});&lt;br /&gt;
});&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=DocTemplate&amp;diff=1364</id>
		<title>DocTemplate</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=DocTemplate&amp;diff=1364"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:05:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!-- Fill out the document title - look at other pages for a good set of examples, see example below --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Doc_Title&lt;br /&gt;
|System=Calidus TMS&lt;br /&gt;
|Title=Execution - Asset Management&lt;br /&gt;
|Reference=EXECUTION&lt;br /&gt;
|Version=2.0&lt;br /&gt;
|Date=11th July 2024&lt;br /&gt;
|Sysver=12.45&lt;br /&gt;
|Client=Aptean&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- DO NOT REMOVE THIS --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- TOC --&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- You could type text into the document in sections - always have a 1st page header like the above --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- See the editing help in your editing window above for formatting details, but below are some quick cribs --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Warning and Note templates stand out --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} Remember this!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning}} Don't do this!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Buttons should be '''BOLD''', right click options should be ''ITALIC'' --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Images are added like this. several examples below. Note when fixing the width (the third example - most Assists have a maximum width of 800px or 1000px. So if the image you are uploading is greater than that, restrict the width, or it won't produce properly in the PDF. If your uploaded image is a small one (&amp;lt;600px wide) then don't fix the width - it will be too fuzzy.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ACCESS_11.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[Image:ACCESS_11.png]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[Image:ACCESS_11.png|800px]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Tables are entered like this. You can add formatting with HTML attributes - First example shows table and header row formatting, while the second example, also shows cell formatting.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Term or Acronym !! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad Hoc Collection	|| Ad Hoc Collections are collections at a consignee or other point, where the actual items to be collected have not been defined, allowing for a free-form scanning of items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Another term	|| Another definition.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;|Term or Acronym !! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad Hoc Collection	|| Ad Hoc Collections are collections at a consignee or other point, where the actual items to be collected have not been defined, allowing for a free-form scanning of items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Another term	|| Another definition.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- You can also add searchable tables, but you MUST have an ID and a class apt-searchable, or it won't work. --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable apt-searchable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;cust_onboard_customer_tags&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;|Term or Acronym !! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad Hoc Collection	|| Ad Hoc Collections are collections at a consignee or other point, where the actual items to be collected have not been defined, allowing for a free-form scanning of items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Another term	|| Another definition.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Logon ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Preferably, transclude pages into your document, so &amp;quot;edit once, updated everywhere&amp;quot; applies --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Logon}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Don't forget to categorise your document - here's some examples&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:C-TMS Training Guides]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Administration - Access &amp;amp; Login|A-101]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Administration Guides]]&lt;br /&gt;
 --&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=PageTemplate&amp;diff=1362</id>
		<title>PageTemplate</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=PageTemplate&amp;diff=1362"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:05:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!-- See the editing help in your editing window above for formatting details, but below are some quick cribs --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- You could type text into the document in sections - NEVER have a 1st page header e.g. = Introduction =. If using sections, use the 2nd and up headings e.g. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction ==  &lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Warning and Note templates stand out --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} Remember this!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning}} Don't do this!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- If you create a page but know that it's not complete enough yet, then consider adding this template to your page - the page is then classified as incomplete, and pretty easy to find later when you want to complete it. &lt;br /&gt;
Any document that transcludes this page will inherit the Incomplete tag as well, so it's really easy to see those that are affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Incomplete}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Buttons should be '''BOLD''', right click options should be ''ITALIC'' --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Images are added like this. several examples below. Note when fixing the width (the third example - most Assists have a maximum width of 800px or 1000px. So if the image you are uploading is greater than that, restrict the width, or it won't produce properly in the PDF. If your uploaded image is a small one (&amp;lt;600px wide) then don't fix the width - it will be too fuzzy.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ACCESS_11.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[Image:ACCESS_11.png]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[Image:ACCESS_11.png|800px]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Tables are entered like this. You can add formatting with HTML attributes - First example shows table and header row formatting, while the second example, also shows cell formatting.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Term or Acronym !! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad Hoc Collection	|| Ad Hoc Collections are collections at a consignee or other point, where the actual items to be collected have not been defined, allowing for a free-form scanning of items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Another term	|| Another definition.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;|Term or Acronym !! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad Hoc Collection	|| Ad Hoc Collections are collections at a consignee or other point, where the actual items to be collected have not been defined, allowing for a free-form scanning of items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Another term	|| Another definition.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- You can also add searchable tables, but you MUST have an ID and a class apt-searchable, or it won't work. --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable apt-searchable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;cust_onboard_customer_tags&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;silver&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;|Term or Acronym !! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad Hoc Collection	|| Ad Hoc Collections are collections at a consignee or other point, where the actual items to be collected have not been defined, allowing for a free-form scanning of items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Another term	|| Another definition.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Preferably, transclude pages into your document from other pages, so &amp;quot;edit once, updated everywhere&amp;quot; applies  e.g. &lt;br /&gt;
{{:Logon}}&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Don't forget to categorise your document - here's some examples from the PLANNING page. ALWAYS surround with noinclude tags like below&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Trip Management|120]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:C-TMS Modules|B-120]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:C-TMS User Guide|BB-120]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:C-TMS_Key_Functionality|140]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 --&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Xref&amp;diff=1360</id>
		<title>Template:Xref</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Xref&amp;diff=1360"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:05:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''{{{Type}}} {{{Num}}}''': ''{{{Text|}}}''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Usage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following includes the type, number and text passed to the template. The example shows how this may be used within an document template. If not, replace the parameters with literals. &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{#vardefine:Example|0}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Xref&lt;br /&gt;
|Num={{ #vardefineecho: Example | {{ #expr: {{ #var: Example }} + 1 }} }}&lt;br /&gt;
|Text=The text describing the cross-reference&lt;br /&gt;
}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Xref&lt;br /&gt;
|Type=Example&lt;br /&gt;
|Num=1&lt;br /&gt;
|Text=The text describing the cross-reference&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Templates|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;params&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;Type&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;aliases&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
			],&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Type&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The cross reference type e.g. Example, Table, etc&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;required&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
		},&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;Num&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;aliases&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
			],&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Num&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The cross-reference number&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;number&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;required&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
		},&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;aliases&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
			],&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The text to describe the cross reference.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;required&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
	},&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The following includes the type, number and text passed to the template. The example shows how this may be used within an document template. If not, replace the parameters with literals. \n &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;\n{{#vardefine:Example|0}}\n{{Xref\n|Num={{ #vardefineecho: Example | {{ #expr: {{ #var: Example }} + 1 }} }}\n|Text=The text describing the cross-reference\n}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/templatedata&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Warning&amp;diff=1358</id>
		<title>Template:Warning</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Warning&amp;diff=1358"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:05:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;{{#if: {{{1|}}}|&amp;lt;table cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background: transparent;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td nowrap=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;position: relative; top: -2px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Attention niels epting.png|18px|Warning|link=]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; '''Warning''': {{#if: {{{1|}}}|&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;padding-left:0.5em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{{1|}}}&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The following displays the warning icon and the word 'Warning:'.  You can follow this with whatever text/images/markup you like. {{warning}} Don't do that!. Alternatively, you can pass the warning text as the parameter, for example {{Warning|Don't do that!}}.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;params&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Text to be included&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Warning text to be displayed in-line and indented.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
	},&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;paramOrder&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
	]&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Templates|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Note&amp;diff=1356</id>
		<title>Template:Note</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Note&amp;diff=1356"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:05:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;{{#if: {{{1|}}}|&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;block-note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;block-contents&amp;quot;&amp;gt;|[[Image:Bulbgraph.png|18px|Note|link=]]}} '''Note:''' {{#if: {{{1|}}}|{{{1}}}&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The following displays the noteicon and the word 'Note:'.  You can follow this with whatever text/images/markup you like. {{note}} Try this!. Alternatively, you can pass the warning text as the parameter, for example {{Note|Try this!}}.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;params&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Text to be included&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Note text to be displayed in-line and indented.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
	},&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;paramOrder&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
	]&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Templates|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Incomplete&amp;diff=1354</id>
		<title>Template:Incomplete</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Incomplete&amp;diff=1354"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:05:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;{{Warning}} This is an incomplete guide.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Incomplete]]&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;params&amp;quot;: {},&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Inserts a warning stating that the page in incomplete, and adds the page to the Incomplete category.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Templates|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Comment&amp;diff=1352</id>
		<title>Template:Comment</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Comment&amp;diff=1352"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:05:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; Wikitext:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{{quote|text=Cry “Havoc,” and let slip the dogs of war.|sign=[[William Shakespeare]]|date=01/01/1889}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Result:&lt;br /&gt;
{{comment|text=Cry “Havoc,” and let slip the dogs of war.|sign=William Shakespeare|date=01/01/1889}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Restrictions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not provide quoted text, the template generates a parser error message, which will appear in red text in the rendered page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If any parameter's actual value contains an equals sign (=), you '''''must''''' use named parameters.  (The equals sign gets interpreted as a named parameter otherwise.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If any parameter's actual value contains characters used for wiki markup syntax (such as vertical bar, brackets, single quotation marks, etc.), you may need to escape it.  See [[Template:!]] and friends.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be wary of URLs which contain restricted characters.  The equals sign is especially common.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Templates|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;params&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;text&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;aliases&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
			],&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Quoted/commented text&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;required&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
		},&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;sign&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;aliases&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
			],&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Person&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Quoted/commenting person&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;wiki-user-name&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;required&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
		},&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;date&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;aliases&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
			],&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Date&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Date of comment&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;date&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;required&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
	},&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Inserts a comment or quote callout.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote class=&amp;quot;templatequote&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;{{{text|{{{1|&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;Your comment here&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;{{error|Error: No text given for quotation (or equals sign used in the actual argument to an unnamed parameter)}}&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;}}}}}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;{{#if:{{{sign|{{{2|&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;TRUE&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;}}}}}}|&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;templatequotecite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#8212;{{{sign|{{{2|&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;Someone&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;}}}}}}{{#if:{{{date|{{{3|&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;TRUE&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;}}}}}}|,&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;cite&amp;gt;{{{date|{{{3|&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;''Date''&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;}}}}}}&amp;lt;/cite&amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;/div &amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Doc_Title&amp;diff=1350</id>
		<title>Template:Doc Title</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:Doc_Title&amp;diff=1350"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:05:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;[[Image:Aptean Logo.png|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{{Client}}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;7&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{{Title}}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{{System}}} {{#ifeq: {{{Sysver|}}} | | | - {{{Sysver}}} }}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{{Date}}} {{#ifeq: {{{Version|}}} | | | - &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;obs_docvers&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{{Version}}}&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; }}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Reference: {{{Reference}}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;A first document page. Use {{Doc_Title}} passing in the parameters below.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;params&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;Client&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Client&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The client, customer or Aptean&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;example&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Aptean&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;default&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Aptean&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;required&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
		},&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The title of the document this title is for.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;example&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Administration - Access Control Guide&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;required&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
		},&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;System&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;System&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The system to which this document pertains&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;example&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;C-TMS&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;suggestedvalues&amp;quot;: [&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;C-TMS&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;CALIDUS&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;C-ePOD&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;C-MCS&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;C-Portal&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;C-Portal TTM&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
				&amp;quot;C-WMS&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
			],&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;default&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;C-TMS&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;required&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
		},&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;Date&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Date&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The date of production&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;example&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;31st December 2024&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;required&amp;quot;: true,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;autovalue&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;default&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;31st December 2024&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
		},&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;Version&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Version&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The version number of the document, e.g. v0.01, v1.00, v2.01. Include the v.&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;example&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;v0.01&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;suggested&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
		},&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;Reference&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Reference&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;A reference for the document. This could be a SalesForce or DevOps reference e.g. SCR-CTMS-12345678-01, or a general reference e.g. ADMINISTRATION&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;string&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;required&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
		},&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;Sysver&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Sysver&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;System Version&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;example&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;12.45&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;number&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;suggested&amp;quot;: true&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
	},&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;format&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;block&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Templates|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:DocLink&amp;diff=1348</id>
		<title>Template:DocLink</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Template:DocLink&amp;diff=1348"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:05:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Templates|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;This is a template to create a link to a PDF document export for a particular page. \n\nThis is achieved with {{DocLink|MyPage}}&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;quot;params&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
		&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;: {&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;label&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;Page name&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;type&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;wiki-page-name&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;required&amp;quot;: true,&lt;br /&gt;
			&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;: &amp;quot;The name of the page that the document will be produced from. Can also be the name of a category by specifying the Category namespace e.g. Did You Know, or Category:Accounts&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
	}&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/templatedata&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;apt-doclink&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[{{fullurl:{{{1}}}}}?action=pdfbook&amp;amp;amp;format=singlebook&amp;amp;amp;notitle DOC]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTLTMS:Privacy_policy&amp;diff=1346</id>
		<title>CTLTMS:Privacy policy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTLTMS:Privacy_policy&amp;diff=1346"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:05:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Initial Creation&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;All content submitted to this documentation is the property of Aptean and will be made available to all customers of Aptean.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTLTMS:General_disclaimer&amp;diff=1345</id>
		<title>CTLTMS:General disclaimer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTLTMS:General_disclaimer&amp;diff=1345"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:04:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Initial Creation&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright Aptean &amp;amp;copy; 2011-{{CURRENTYEAR}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of Aptean and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also added to and maintained from various other sources outside of Aptean and may be from but not limited to customers of Aptean. No declaration is made that this documentation is up to date or valid for the version of the application being described here, as pertains to the version of the software installed for the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTLTMS:About&amp;diff=1344</id>
		<title>CTLTMS:About</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTLTMS:About&amp;diff=1344"/>
		<updated>2024-08-21T10:03:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Initial Creation&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''CALIDUS'' Total Logistics Transport Management System is Copyright (c) 2017-{{CURRENTYEAR}} Aptean. [https://aptean.com/ Aptean]. All Rights Reserved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''CALIDUS'' Assist System Copyright &amp;amp;copy; 2011-{{CURRENTYEAR}} [https://aptean.com/ Aptean]. All Rights Reserved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of Aptean and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition&amp;diff=1343</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition&amp;diff=1343"/>
		<updated>2024-08-17T08:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* veCenterLoader[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=ext.visualEditor.desktopArticleTarget.init]|veCenterLoader.js&lt;br /&gt;
* veCenter[ResourceLoader|default|rights=hidden|hidden|dependencies=ext.visualEditor.core]|veCenter.js&lt;br /&gt;
* autonum[ResourceLoader|default]|autonum.css|autonum.js&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-veCenter.js&amp;diff=1341</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Gadget-veCenter.js</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-veCenter.js&amp;diff=1341"/>
		<updated>2024-08-17T08:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;mw.loader.using( [ 'ext.visualEditor.core', 'ext.visualEditor.mwtransclusion' ] ).then(function () {&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
// --------- (start of ve.ui.CenterAction definition) -----------------------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
// This is based on [lib/ve/src/ui/actions/ve.ui.BlockquoteAction.js] from Extension:VisualEditor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterAction = function VeUiCenterAction() {&lt;br /&gt;
		ve.ui.CenterAction.super.apply( this, arguments );&lt;br /&gt;
	};&lt;br /&gt;
	OO.inheritClass( ve.ui.CenterAction, ve.ui.Action );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterAction.static.name = 'center';&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterAction.static.methods = [ 'wrap', 'unwrap', 'toggle' ];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterAction.prototype.isWrapped = function () {&lt;br /&gt;
		var fragment = this.surface.getModel().getFragment();&lt;br /&gt;
		return fragment.hasMatchingAncestor( 'center' );&lt;br /&gt;
	};&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterAction.prototype.toggle = function () {&lt;br /&gt;
		return this[ this.isWrapped() ? 'unwrap' : 'wrap' ]();&lt;br /&gt;
	};&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterAction.prototype.wrap = function () {&lt;br /&gt;
		var&lt;br /&gt;
			surfaceModel = this.surface.getModel(),&lt;br /&gt;
			selection = surfaceModel.getSelection(),&lt;br /&gt;
			fragment = surfaceModel.getFragment( null, true ),&lt;br /&gt;
			leaves, leavesRange;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		if ( !( selection instanceof ve.dm.LinearSelection ) ) {&lt;br /&gt;
			return false;&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		leaves = fragment.getSelectedLeafNodes();&lt;br /&gt;
		leavesRange = new ve.Range(&lt;br /&gt;
			leaves[ 0 ].getRange().start,&lt;br /&gt;
			leaves[ leaves.length - 1 ].getRange().end&lt;br /&gt;
		);&lt;br /&gt;
		fragment = surfaceModel.getLinearFragment( leavesRange, true );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		fragment = fragment.expandLinearSelection( 'siblings' );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		while (&lt;br /&gt;
			fragment.getCoveredNodes().some( function ( nodeInfo ) {&lt;br /&gt;
				return !nodeInfo.node.isAllowedParentNodeType( 'center' ) || nodeInfo.node.isContent();&lt;br /&gt;
			} )&lt;br /&gt;
		) {&lt;br /&gt;
			fragment = fragment.expandLinearSelection( 'parent' );&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		// Wrap everything in a &amp;lt;center&amp;gt; tag&lt;br /&gt;
		fragment.wrapAllNodes( { type: 'center' } );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		return true;&lt;br /&gt;
	};&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterAction.prototype.unwrap = function () {&lt;br /&gt;
		var&lt;br /&gt;
			surfaceModel = this.surface.getModel(),&lt;br /&gt;
			selection = surfaceModel.getSelection(),&lt;br /&gt;
			fragment = surfaceModel.getFragment( null, true ),&lt;br /&gt;
			leaves, leavesRange;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		if ( !( selection instanceof ve.dm.LinearSelection ) ) {&lt;br /&gt;
			return false;&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		if ( !this.isWrapped() ) {&lt;br /&gt;
			return false;&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		leaves = fragment.getSelectedLeafNodes();&lt;br /&gt;
		leavesRange = new ve.Range(&lt;br /&gt;
			leaves[ 0 ].getRange().start,&lt;br /&gt;
			leaves[ leaves.length - 1 ].getRange().end&lt;br /&gt;
		);&lt;br /&gt;
		fragment = surfaceModel.getLinearFragment( leavesRange, true );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		fragment&lt;br /&gt;
			// Expand to cover entire &amp;lt;center&amp;gt; tag&lt;br /&gt;
			.expandLinearSelection( 'closest', ve.dm.CenterNode )&lt;br /&gt;
			// Unwrap it&lt;br /&gt;
			.unwrapNodes( 0, 1 );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
		return true;&lt;br /&gt;
	};&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.actionFactory.register( ve.ui.CenterAction );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
// --------- (end of ve.ui.CenterAction definition) -------------------------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterFormatTool = function VeUiCenterFormatTool() {&lt;br /&gt;
		ve.ui.CenterFormatTool.super.apply( this, arguments );&lt;br /&gt;
	};&lt;br /&gt;
	OO.inheritClass( ve.ui.CenterFormatTool, ve.ui.FormatTool );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterFormatTool.static.name = 'center';&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterFormatTool.static.group = 'format';&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterFormatTool.static.title = 'Center';&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterFormatTool.static.format = { type: 'center' };&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.CenterFormatTool.static.commandName = 'center';&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.toolFactory.register( ve.ui.CenterFormatTool );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.commandRegistry.register(&lt;br /&gt;
		new ve.ui.Command(&lt;br /&gt;
			'center', 'center', 'toggle',&lt;br /&gt;
			{ supportedSelections: [ 'linear' ] }&lt;br /&gt;
		)&lt;br /&gt;
	);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	ve.ui.triggerRegistry.register(&lt;br /&gt;
		'center', {&lt;br /&gt;
			mac: new ve.ui.Trigger('cmd+j'),&lt;br /&gt;
			pc: new ve.ui.Trigger('ctrl+j')&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
	);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
} );&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-veCenterLoader&amp;diff=1339</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Gadget-veCenterLoader</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-veCenterLoader&amp;diff=1339"/>
		<updated>2024-08-17T08:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Add Center to the Format list in VisualEditor&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-autonum.css&amp;diff=1337</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Gadget-autonum.css</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-autonum.css&amp;diff=1337"/>
		<updated>2024-08-17T08:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;/**&lt;br /&gt;
 * Auto-number headings&lt;br /&gt;
 *&lt;br /&gt;
 * @source https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Snippets/Auto-number_headings&lt;br /&gt;
 * @author Krinkle&lt;br /&gt;
 * @version 2024-07-28&lt;br /&gt;
 */&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/**&lt;br /&gt;
 * CSS mode:&lt;br /&gt;
 * Insert numbers on pages without a TOC. This could in principle work for all pages,&lt;br /&gt;
 * but to ensure consistency between the TOC and heading numbers we let JS follow&lt;br /&gt;
 * the TOC if there is one.&lt;br /&gt;
 */&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output {&lt;br /&gt;
  counter-reset: autonum-h2 autonum-h3 autonum-h4 autonum-h5 autonum-h6;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output h2 {&lt;br /&gt;
  counter-reset: autonum-h3 autonum-h4 autonum-h5 autonum-h6;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output h3 {&lt;br /&gt;
  counter-reset: autonum-h4 autonum-h5 autonum-h6;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output h4 {&lt;br /&gt;
  counter-reset: autonum-h5 autonum-h6;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output h5 {&lt;br /&gt;
  counter-reset: autonum-h6;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output h2 .mw-headline:before,&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output .mw-heading h2:before {&lt;br /&gt;
  counter-increment: autonum-h2;&lt;br /&gt;
  content: counter(autonum-h2) &amp;quot; &amp;quot;;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output h3 .mw-headline:before,&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output .mw-heading h3:before {&lt;br /&gt;
  counter-increment: autonum-h3;&lt;br /&gt;
  content: counter(autonum-h2) &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; counter(autonum-h3) &amp;quot; &amp;quot;;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output h4 .mw-headline:before,&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output .mw-heading h4:before {&lt;br /&gt;
  counter-increment: autonum-h4;&lt;br /&gt;
  content: counter(autonum-h2) &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; counter(autonum-h3) &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; counter(autonum-h4) &amp;quot; &amp;quot;;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output h5 .mw-headline:before,&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output .mw-heading h5:before {&lt;br /&gt;
  counter-increment: autonum-h5;&lt;br /&gt;
  content: counter(autonum-h2) &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; counter(autonum-h3) &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; counter(autonum-h4) &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; counter(autonum-h5) &amp;quot; &amp;quot;;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output h6 .mw-headline:before,&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum .mw-parser-output .mw-heading h6:before {&lt;br /&gt;
  counter-increment: autonum-h6;&lt;br /&gt;
  content: counter(autonum-h2) &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; counter(autonum-h3) &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; counter(autonum-h4) &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; counter(autonum-h5) &amp;quot;.&amp;quot; counter(autonum-h6) &amp;quot; &amp;quot;;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/**&lt;br /&gt;
 * JS mode: When a TOC is present, autonum.js sets the data-autonum attribute&lt;br /&gt;
 * and we display that instead of an automatic counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 */&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum-attr .mw-parser-output .mw-headline[data-autonum]:before,&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum-attr .mw-parser-output h2[data-autonum]:before ,&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum-attr .mw-parser-output h3[data-autonum]:before ,&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum-attr .mw-parser-output h4[data-autonum]:before ,&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum-attr .mw-parser-output h5[data-autonum]:before ,&lt;br /&gt;
.tpl-autonum-attr .mw-parser-output h6[data-autonum]:before {&lt;br /&gt;
  content: attr(data-autonum) &amp;quot; &amp;quot;;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-autonum.js&amp;diff=1335</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Gadget-autonum.js</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-autonum.js&amp;diff=1335"/>
		<updated>2024-08-17T08:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;/**&lt;br /&gt;
 * Auto-number headings&lt;br /&gt;
 *&lt;br /&gt;
 * @source https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Snippets/Auto-number_headings&lt;br /&gt;
 * @author Krinkle&lt;br /&gt;
 * @version 2024-07-28&lt;br /&gt;
 */&lt;br /&gt;
var toc = document.querySelector('#toc');&lt;br /&gt;
if (toc) {&lt;br /&gt;
  document.body.classList.add('tpl-autonum-attr');&lt;br /&gt;
  // Support legacy Parser: &amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=mw-headline id=…&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  // Support Parsoid: &amp;lt;section&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div class=mw-heading&amp;gt;&amp;lt;h2 id…&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  document.querySelectorAll('.mw-parser-output :is(h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6) .mw-headline[id], .mw-parser-output .mw-heading [id]:is(h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6)').forEach(function (headline) {&lt;br /&gt;
    var num = toc.querySelector('a[href=&amp;quot;#' + CSS.escape(headline.id) + '&amp;quot;] .tocnumber');&lt;br /&gt;
    if (num) headline.setAttribute('data-autonum', num.textContent);&lt;br /&gt;
  });&lt;br /&gt;
} else {&lt;br /&gt;
  document.body.classList.add('tpl-autonum');&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-autonum&amp;diff=1333</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Gadget-autonum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-autonum&amp;diff=1333"/>
		<updated>2024-08-17T08:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Allow ability to auto-number headings when viewing pages (replacing setting removed from MediaWiki v1.39)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-veCenterLoader.js&amp;diff=1331</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Gadget-veCenterLoader.js</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-veCenterLoader.js&amp;diff=1331"/>
		<updated>2024-08-17T08:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;mw.libs.ve.addPlugin('ext.gadget.veCenter');&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Timeless.css&amp;diff=1329</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Timeless.css</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Timeless.css&amp;diff=1329"/>
		<updated>2024-08-17T08:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;/* CSS placed here will affect users of the Timeless skin */&lt;br /&gt;
h1,h2,h3,h4, #p-logo-text a {font-family: 'Segoe UI','Segoe UI Emoji','Segoe UI Symbol','Lato','Liberation Sans','Noto Sans','Helvetica Neue','Helvetica',sans-serif !important;} &lt;br /&gt;
#p-logo-text a { font-variant: normal !important;}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Vector.css&amp;diff=1327</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Vector.css</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Vector.css&amp;diff=1327"/>
		<updated>2024-08-17T08:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;/* CSS placed here will affect users of the Vector skin */&lt;br /&gt;
h1, h2, h3, h4 {font-family: sans-serif !important;}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Common.css&amp;diff=1325</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Common.css</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Common.css&amp;diff=1325"/>
		<updated>2024-08-17T08:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;/* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */&lt;br /&gt;
.apt-search-clear {background: url(&amp;quot;images/Clear_Icon.png&amp;quot;) no-repeat 5px center; padding:5px 5px 5px 30px; border:0; background-size: 1em;}&lt;br /&gt;
.apt-doclink {box-sizing: border-box;font-family: &amp;quot;Google Sans&amp;quot;, Roboto, Arial, sans-serif;line-height: normal;background: url(images/pdf.png) no-repeat 5px center;background-size: 1.0em;padding: 0.1em 0.5em 0.1em 1.5em;font-size: smaller;}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Group-user.css&amp;diff=1323</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Group-user.css</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Group-user.css&amp;diff=1323"/>
		<updated>2024-08-17T08:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;/* CSS placed here will affect registered users only */&lt;br /&gt;
.apt-user-show {display: block !important;}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Common.js&amp;diff=1321</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Common.js</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Common.js&amp;diff=1321"/>
		<updated>2024-08-17T08:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: 1 revision imported&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;/* Any JavaScript here will be loaded for all users on every page load. */&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
// Javascript/jQuery code for searching tables&lt;br /&gt;
function search_table(tableID, value){  &lt;br /&gt;
	$('#'+tableID+' tr').each(function(){  &lt;br /&gt;
		 var found = 'false';  &lt;br /&gt;
		 if (!$(this).hasClass('non-searchable')) {&lt;br /&gt;
			 $(this).each(function(){  &lt;br /&gt;
				if ($(this).find('td.non-searchable').length &amp;gt; 0) {&lt;br /&gt;
					   found = 'true';  &lt;br /&gt;
				} else if (!$(this).find('th').length &amp;gt; 0) {&lt;br /&gt;
				  if($(this).text().toLowerCase().indexOf(value.toLowerCase()) &amp;gt;= 0)  &lt;br /&gt;
				  {  &lt;br /&gt;
					   found = 'true';  &lt;br /&gt;
				  }&lt;br /&gt;
				} else {&lt;br /&gt;
					// Always keep the header row&lt;br /&gt;
					found = 'true';&lt;br /&gt;
				}&lt;br /&gt;
			 });  &lt;br /&gt;
			 if(found == 'true')  &lt;br /&gt;
			 {  &lt;br /&gt;
				  $(this).show();  &lt;br /&gt;
			 }  &lt;br /&gt;
			 else  &lt;br /&gt;
			 {  &lt;br /&gt;
				  $(this).hide();  &lt;br /&gt;
			 }  &lt;br /&gt;
		 }&lt;br /&gt;
	});  &lt;br /&gt;
}  &lt;br /&gt;
$(document).ready(function(){&lt;br /&gt;
	$(&amp;quot;table.apt-searchable&amp;quot;).each(function(index, element) {&lt;br /&gt;
		if (this.id !== '') {&lt;br /&gt;
			$('&amp;lt;input type=&amp;quot;text&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;'+this.id+'_'+index+'&amp;quot; onkeyup=&amp;quot;search_table(\''+this.id+'\',$(this).val())&amp;quot; placeholder=&amp;quot;Search the table...&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;input type=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot; onclick=&amp;quot;$(\'#'+this.id+'_'+index+'\').val(\'\');search_table(\''+this.id+'\',\'\')&amp;quot; title=&amp;quot;Clear Entry&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;apt-search-clear&amp;quot;&amp;gt;').insertBefore($(this));&lt;br /&gt;
		}&lt;br /&gt;
	});&lt;br /&gt;
});&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_CTMS_User_Configuration&amp;diff=1318</id>
		<title>CTL CTMS User Configuration</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_CTMS_User_Configuration&amp;diff=1318"/>
		<updated>2024-08-02T12:26:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Minor correction&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Users will be set up through CTMS access control for access of CTMS and CTL systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The users should be assigned to an access control group – see the standard CTMS functionality guides on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users should have parameters set against them, especially the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*	The existing BASED_AT will define the Central Tyre depot to which they have been assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
*	If the user should have access to all depots, then the ALL_DEPOTS parameter should be set instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CTL users must have access to the CTL menus through their assigned group (typically CTL):&lt;br /&gt;
*	FIA Reports - CTL-04-REP.CTL-04-REP-02&lt;br /&gt;
*	Maintenance - CTL.CTL-01-MNT&lt;br /&gt;
*	Process - CTL.CTL-03-ORD&lt;br /&gt;
*	Reports - CTL.CTL-04-REP&lt;br /&gt;
*	Root Menu - CTL.CTL-99-CTL&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tasks - CTL.CTL-02-TSK&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Call Logging - CTL-03-ORD.CTL-02-ORD-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Axle Configuration - CTL-01-MNT.CTL-01-MNT-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Fleet Maintenance - CTL-02-TSK.CTL-02-TSK-01&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these menus should NOT have &amp;quot;In Menu?&amp;quot; ticked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
External (e.g. ITDN) users also require the following parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
*	A new parameter “EXTERNAL_CALL_LOGGING” will be available. For external users of Call Logging (i.e. ITDN) this parameter should be set.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_CTMS_User_Configuration&amp;diff=1317</id>
		<title>CTL CTMS User Configuration</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_CTMS_User_Configuration&amp;diff=1317"/>
		<updated>2024-08-02T12:19:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Minor formatting change&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Users will be set up through CTMS access control for access of CTMS and CTL systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The users should be assigned to an access control group – see the standard CTMS functionality guides on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users should have parameters set against them, especially the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*	The existing BASED_AT will define the Central Tyre depot to which they have been assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
*	If the user should have access to all depots, then the ALL_DEPOTS parameter should be set instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CTL users must have access to the CTL menus through their assigned group (typically CTL):&lt;br /&gt;
*	FIA Reports - CTL-04-REP.CTL-04-REP-02&lt;br /&gt;
*	Maintenance - CTL.CTL-01-MNT&lt;br /&gt;
*	Process - CTL.CTL-03-ORD&lt;br /&gt;
*	Reports - CTL.CTL-04-REP&lt;br /&gt;
*	Root Menu - CTL.CTL-99-CTL&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tasks - CTL.CTL-02-TSK&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Call Logging - CTL-03-ORD.CTL-02-ORD-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Axle Configuration - CTL-01-MNT.CTL-01-MNT-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Fleet Maintenance - CTL-02-TSK.CTL-02-TSK-01&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these menus should NOT have &amp;quot;In Menu?&amp;quot; ticked.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_CTMS_User_Configuration&amp;diff=1316</id>
		<title>CTL CTMS User Configuration</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=CTL_CTMS_User_Configuration&amp;diff=1316"/>
		<updated>2024-08-02T12:18:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Initial Creation&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Users will be set up through CTMS access control for access of CTMS and CTL systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The users should be assigned to an access control group – see the standard CTMS functionality guides on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users should have parameters set against them, especially the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*	The existing BASED_AT will define the Central Tyre depot to which they have been assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
*	If the user should have access to all depots, then the ALL_DEPOTS parameter should be set instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CTL users must have access to the CTL menus through their assigned group (typically CTL):&lt;br /&gt;
*	FIA Reports - CTL-04-REP.CTL-04-REP-02&lt;br /&gt;
*	Maintenance - CTL.CTL-01-MNT&lt;br /&gt;
*	Process - CTL.CTL-03-ORD&lt;br /&gt;
*	Reports - CTL.CTL-04-REP&lt;br /&gt;
*	Root Menu - CTL.CTL-99-CTL&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tasks - CTL.CTL-02-TSK&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Call Logging - CTL-03-ORD.CTL-02-ORD-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Axle Configuration - CTL-01-MNT.CTL-01-MNT-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Fleet Maintenance - CTL-02-TSK.CTL-02-TSK-01&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these menus should NOT have “In Menu?” ticked.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Call_Logging_-_Tyres&amp;diff=1315</id>
		<title>Call Logging - Tyres</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Call_Logging_-_Tyres&amp;diff=1315"/>
		<updated>2024-07-30T11:07:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Updated c&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This screen allows you to control the booking process of an order, and control the continued contact with the customer to affect a seamless delivery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-FilterMain.png|''Call Logging''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
* Quickly find orders through a variety of criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* See all pertinent information about the customer's order, to aid in responding to customer queries.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add instructions to the driver, including &amp;quot;Call X Minutes Before Arrival&amp;quot; information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Book an order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add additional services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can query orders by entering criteria in the Search panel:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - a drop-down list of all configured parent customers in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer'' - the orders' customer code. You can enter the code directly or use the {{Button|Lookup}} button to find a customer. The screen will display a pop-up customer search window, allowing you to search by ''Name'', ''Address'' or ''Postcode''. You can enter partials of any of these. You can cancel the query by closing the pop-up window, or display matching results by pressing the '''Find''' button. The screen will display a pop-up window of matching customers in a results table. You can return to the customer search window by closing the results window or clicking the '''Cancel''' button. You can select a customer by clicking on the row for that customer. The screen will close both the results and customer search windows and enter the customer code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Depot'' - the depot that owns the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - the order's customer reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Status'' - a drop-down list of all order statuses configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Location'' - the location of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date From'' - the date from which orders are selected. The screen will default this to today's date. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button to select a date. The date cannot be more than 7 days in the past.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date To'' - the date up to which orders are selected. The screen will default this to 10 days into the future. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button to select a date. The date cannot be less than the date from.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type'' - a drop-down list of all order types configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - a drop-down list of all service levels configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reset the query criteria to the default values by clicking the '''Clear''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click the '''Find''' button to execute the query - the screen will display the matching orders in the results table.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Main.png|''Results after filtering''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} The last 10 orders you select will be shown in the Recent Orders list in the Search panel - you can quickly re-select a previous order (regardless of search criteria you now have) by clicking on the order row in this list  - the screen will display the Details panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to display the following fields in the results table (using the {{Button|Column Selector}}:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver PostCode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Postal Region''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To Name''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Type''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Current Location''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Mode''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Active''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Vehicle''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Technician''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Process Id''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Update Counter''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of jobs is colour coded:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Unscheduled/Invalid - Red&lt;br /&gt;
*	Booked/Scheduled - Amber&lt;br /&gt;
*	Complete/Delivered - Green&lt;br /&gt;
*	Failed/cancelled/On-hold - normal white/grey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select an order to view or edit by clicking on the row - the screen will display the Details panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png|''Detail panel, showing common details, details tab and notes''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Details panel is made up of multiple sections:&lt;br /&gt;
* Common order details, situated on the top-left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* Additional details, situated in the top-right of the screen. You can select different detailed information to view or edit using the tab bar provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notes, situated at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create a new order by opening the Details panel and clicking on the {{Button|New}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating or updating a job, the screen will check the credit status limit of the customer selected through the unique customer code. This will check with Elucid directly, and that credit status limit (of the child or parent account) will be used when checking whether products may be fitted, or services rendered. Note that this may also include unposted or incomplete sales invoices / credit notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This check on credit limits also applies when adding new lines to a job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Order Details section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Status'' - the booking status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Ref'' - the TMS order reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - the order's customer reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status'' - the order status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Code'' - the customer of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - the parent customer of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collection'' details, including the address and collection window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Delivery'' details, including the address and delivery window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Weight'' - the total weight of all items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Items'' - the number of items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Volume'' - the total volume of the items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - the order's service level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter or amend the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Driver Instructions'' - any general instructions to the driver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also see:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer instructions'' - any instructions configured against the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Preferred Brand'' - any preferred brand information configured against the custome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also click the {{Button|Run SLA Report}} button to view any additional customer restrictions if configured against the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can save the changed details of the order in this section using the '''Save''' button. The screen will leave the order open for further amendments. If you have finished with the order, you can click the '''Save and Close''' button instead to save the details and close the details window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can refresh the order details using the '''Refresh''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can close the details section without saving any changes using the '''Close''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the following buttons on this tab:&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|New}} - create a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Delete}} - delete an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Help}} - help on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Undo}} - Undo any changes since last save.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Clear}} - clear all fields.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Toggle}} - toggle display of all accordion headers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen allows you to reject (cancel) a job using the {{Button|Delete}} button. In this case, you are requested to enter a reason why this was rejected.&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the call is taken, the user quotes a price to the customer, the customer rejects the price. The job will be captured, but the job will be cancelled with a reason code (e.g. too pricey).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional Details section ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Additional Details section consists of the following tabs:&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Details'' - additional order details information.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Contact'' - customer contact information.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Tyres'' - deliverable tyres and services.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Booking'' - book the dates and times of the job.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Services'' - a facility to add equipment and services to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Trips'' - the booked trip for the job, in terms of pickup and drop-off times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Details tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you enter all of the details for a new order, or amend details for an existing order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png|''Details tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - generated automatically by the system when the job is saved.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Breakdown Ref'' - a third-party reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Authorisation Code'' - required authorisation code from the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - the parent customer. A lookup is provided with search criteria. If a parent customer is selected, this will filter the Customer lookup. If you enter a customer first, the Invoice To field will automatically populate.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer'' - the customer. A lookup is provided with search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Actual Customer'' - a text field for reporting purposes - only entered when the customer selected is a &amp;quot;slush account&amp;quot; combining many small customers. This will appear in the customer name on the service report if populated.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Use Planning Region'' - limit the selection of locations to those your user is allowed to see.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Location'' - the job location. A lookup is provided. The lookup will show only the addresses for that customer, and optionally only those within your user's configured planning region.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Depot'' - the owning depot of the job - this will default to your configured depot. A lookup is provided. The lookup will sort based on the distance away from the callout location, and this distance is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Carrier'' - the depot executing the job. This will default to your configured depot. A lookup is provided. The lookup will sort based on the distance away from the callout location, and this distance is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - the service level. A drop-down list of service levels is provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg No/Fleet No'' - the vehicle being serviced for non-fleet inspection jobs. A lookup is provided with search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the call-out is not at a known address, the user can search for and select a location from the map, which will create a new location for the job and customer. There are editing facilities to the address after selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also add a new vehicle for this customer and location using the {{Button|New Vehicle}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
You will be prompted to enter:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg No/Fleet No'': This is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Vehicle Type'': This is required. You can select from a drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description'': This is freetext and optional.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Axle Configuration'': This is optional. See notes below.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Fleet Location'': This will default to the fleet location selected as the job destination location. You can change this through the lookup provided.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|&lt;br /&gt;
* Once a vehicle is created without a configuration in the call logging screen, this vehicle cannot then be amended in this screen to add the configuration. The Vehicle Fleet Maintenance screen can be used to modify the vehicle and add a configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
* The selected vehicle may now not have an axle configuration against it, so the tyre positions will not be known. In this case, the screen will check and will only allow van stock to be booked if the vehicle does not have an axle configuration associated to it.&lt;br /&gt;
* If fitment of new or other tyres, or services are to be installed on the vehicle, then you should write the position and required work in the notes, so that the technician can see them and do the work required. Tyres should be booked as van stock if required.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have added these details and saved, you can move on to other details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contact tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab shows all of the end customer contact information for the order in a table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Contacts.png|''Contacts tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Contacts - any contacts you have added or amended against this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Location Contacts - pre-saved contacts against the from location, to location or against the customer's default (billing or invoice) location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{Button|New Order Contact}} button will create a new order contact in the table below. You can also save this new contact to the location for re-use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location contacts are preconfigured for contact preferences:&lt;br /&gt;
* Report - use this contact to email the completed service report.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tracking - use this contact to email tracking emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, order contacts can be specified for Text, which will send the phone information against that contact to the EPOD system, so the technician can contact the customer directly via text or phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any location contacts that are checked will be used - if you want to change that, select the contact and save as an order contact, and change the contact preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the contacts used against an order, click on it in the bottom Location Contacts list and save - this will save this as an Order Contact (which will over-ride the Location contacts). They you can change the check boxes against the order contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any location contacts that have been overridden in order contacts will be indicated by the row being greyed out - you will not be able to select that location contact again unless you delete the order contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning}} When you want to override a location contact, do not change the forename, surname, email or telephone details. If you do change these, this is then seen as a different order contact, and doesn't override the existing location contact. You will see that, because the location contact will not be greyed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to email the completion report to all contacts that have been defaulted as &amp;quot;Report&amp;quot; against the order and locations, you don't have to change anything - all of the emails against those ticked contacts will be sent to EPOD for the sending of the completion report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to add a contact JUST FOR THIS ORDER ONLY, click the {{Button|New Order Contact}} button and enter the details. Do not check the &amp;quot;Save as Location&amp;quot; check box and click {{Button|Save}}. This will create a new order contact, for this order only, and will appear just in the Order Contacts table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to add a contact for any orders to this location from this point forwards, click the {{Button|New Order Contact}} button and enter the details. Check the &amp;quot;Save as Location&amp;quot; check box and click {{Button|Save}}. This will create a new order contact, for this order only. This contact will appear in the Order Contacts table, and also in the Location Contacts table below, but greyed out (as there is an order contact over-riding it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change a contact so that it doesn't send the report from this point forward for any jobs, select the contact in the Location Contacts table, then untick the Report box and click {{Button|Save}}. This will update the location contact. This will also create this as an order contact, so you can change it on this order alone if you want to - the location contact will be greyed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change a contact so that it doesn't send the report FOR THIS ORDER ONLY, select the contact in the Location Contacts table and click {{Button|Save}} - that will create an order contact. Then select the order contact created and untick the Report box and click {{Button|Save}}. This will update the order contact only and over-ride the location contact. The contact will be greyed out in the Location Contacts section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to add some more emails or phone numbers for an existing location contact, create a new order or location contact as described above, and change the phone and/or email information. You will end up with multiple order and/or location contacts, depending on which of the scenarios above you followed. Any matching location contacts will be greyed out and over-ridden if all of the contact information is the same in the order contact compared to the location contact (i.e. the forename, surname, phone and email).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tyres tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays the summary of types of items on the order (the order lines) and can display each individual order item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays the order summary (lines) in a table with the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Work Type'' - one of Fit New, Fit Other, Services Only, Van Stock, Removal.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Position''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Services'' - popup to show services booked on this line.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Product''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Store''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Quantity''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Price''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres3.png|''Tyres panel''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click on an existing tyre to edit it, or add a new tyre with the {{Button|New}} button. In both cases, the screen will display the Items popup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be allowed to select the type of work being booked to a job when selecting tyres:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fit New&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fit Other&lt;br /&gt;
*	Services Only&lt;br /&gt;
*	Van Stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general, most deliverables work the same way:&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a vehicle position&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a product using the Part Search lookup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-PartSearch1.png|''Part Search Parameters''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Search allows you to select parameters for the search - they are matched partially:&lt;br /&gt;
* Product&lt;br /&gt;
* Depot&lt;br /&gt;
* Description&lt;br /&gt;
* Manufacturer&lt;br /&gt;
The screen also displays the nearest stock holding location, for information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching parts are displayed, and you can select the part you need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-PartSearch2.png|''Part Search Results''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Fit New:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Select a depot and position.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Search for a part using the part search.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Once selected, all of the details are displayed, and the quantity is defaulted to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres2.png|''Fit New''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Work Type	Option select one, default to Fit New&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Defaulted&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Lookup - part search&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Set from product, can be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product -label changed to Diameter&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On clicking save, the screen will add a tyre to the selected tyres and display the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If new tyres are to be installed on the vehicle, then the user should book van stock against the job and write the position in the notes, so that the technician can see them and do the work required. Tyres should be booked as van stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Services Only, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-ServicesOnly.png|''Services Only''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Not enabled, as not selecting a product to sell&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will also show all services that can be supplied to that vehicle type that are related to a tyre position. The user must select at least one of these services, although several can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On saving, the service supplied will be saved and displayed in the booked work list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Van Stock, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-VanStock.png|''Van Stock''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Default to depot, select from drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Lookup - part search&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Must be entered with a quantity greater than 0&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On clicking save, the screen will add the selected quantity of tyres and display the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Fit Other, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-FitOther.png|''Fit Other''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Part search, but just for product, not store, can be left blank&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Blank&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The part search in this instance will be searching for any product code, not specifically those sold by the depot, just any known product, as this is intended to allow the user to book customer-owned product rather that sell them a tyre from depot stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will also show all services that can be supplied to that vehicle type that are related to a tyre position. The user must select at least one of these services, although several can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Booking tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to modify the delivery date of the order based on the customer's requirements, and to select the technician and vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Booking.png|''Booking tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can manually set a booking date and time window here. This will default to today’s date, and to the expected delivery time, based on the service level. For example, if the time is 1200, and the service level is 60-90 minutes, the book time will default to 1330.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a job is created, a service level will be identified. This, along with the start/booked time, will determine the window for the job. For example, &amp;quot;60-90 minutes&amp;quot; may be a service level. If the job is booked at the correct time of 1200, the window will be 1200-1330. &lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, scheduled jobs will typically be scheduled at 0600 on the day and will be able to be completed at any time of the day.&lt;br /&gt;
This will be used to determine whether the job was completed in time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will list the Technicians assigned to that selected carrier. The screen provides decision assistance to the operator to select the correct Technician. &lt;br /&gt;
The screen will use the current workload assigned to the Technician, how long they have been working on it, how long the job is expected to take and the current location of the Technician and progress through the current job and distance to the job in question to determine the potential arrival time. The screen will also show the shifts on which the technician is assigned, to aid in identifying the out-of-hours technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system uses the hub location of the technician to determine travel time. It also uses the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;to&amp;quot; locations of the order to determine the travel time from the hub location, to the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location (to pick up product) and then to the “to” location. The system uses average loading/fitment times depending on the number of tyres selected to determine the length of a job and factors this in, along with ETAs from the device if the job is in progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the order may now be booked from an outside store location, this is the location that is used to calculate the ETA of the technician at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current job will be determined by the job in progress on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
The current location will be determined from the device location.&lt;br /&gt;
The length of the job will be determined from the actions taking place or items being delivered. This will be configured against the line type, with each configured for a number of minutes per item. There are expected to be 3:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Fitment – for example, 15 minute per tyre fitted once the location is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Supply – for example, one minute per tyre being delivered.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Inspection – for example, 5 minutes per vehicle to be inspected, with the quantity of the line set to the number of vehicles, to give finer control of how long the job is expected to be.&lt;br /&gt;
If the driver arrived 5 minutes ago, and the job is expected to take 30 minutes based on these calculations, the system will know that there is an expected 25 minutes remaining on that job before they can depart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will indicate the availability of that driver, using the assigned shift and resource availability calendar to determine whether the driver may be used. As noted, this is decision assistance - the driver may still be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may then assign the technician's van, if required. If the technician has a default vehicle or is already working in a van, then this will be defaulted to that van. You can change the van here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once selected, click the {{Button|Book}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the technician or vehicle, click the {{Button|Release}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the call is logged, booked and assigned to the driver, the job will be planned onto the technician's workload and sent over to their device. This will generate a workload on the device (if one does not already exist), a collection job (if picking up van stock or installing a new tyre) and a service job of the type specified to do the work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a job is booked to a technician for the first job of that day, the system creates a workload for that technician, starting at the start-up time of that driver's shift, then factoring in the time as above from the specified start time of the job, to determine the ETA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the driver has a specific hub location (i.e. does not work directly in the carrier hub location), the system will use that specific hub location to determine the start and end points of the trip and therefore the travel time to the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Services tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to view set any additional equipment or services against the order. You can select from a drop-down list of configured services or equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Services.png|''Services tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For completed jobs, the services supplied against the job will be visible here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have selected the service or equipment, you can set the quantity and add it using the {{Button|New}} button provided. The screen will add this to the displayed list of equipment and services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trips tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display any trips onto which the order has been planned, showing all pickup and drop-off stops. You can use this information to quickly answer queries from the customer as to the planning status and progress of the delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Trips.png|''Trips tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display this information in a trips table, showing the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Trip Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Stop Type''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Location Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Location Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Planned''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Actual''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to enter notes against the order. You can see all previously-entered notes in a list, with the most recent on the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several of the actions that you take in this screen will automatically generate notes for you, to provide an audit trail of customer contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also enter any note, by keying the note in the ''Add New Note'' field and clicking the {{Button|Save}} button when you have finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen logs the creation and amendment date, time and user of all entered notes, whether they were entered automatically or manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Top-up Transfers ==&lt;br /&gt;
Top-up Transfers are a job type that allows tyres to be taken to a technician whilst on a job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a job in CTL, a new Job Type will be available called &amp;quot;Top-up Transfer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select this, the screen will allow you to select a technician and an order on which they require additional product – the screen will show the orders on the selected technician's current trip and allow them to select to job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will then copy the basic order details for a new job to transfer product to that technician. That will be customer, destination location, customer vehicle, etc. The job will not be saved automatically – the details will just be copied into the screen for you to save if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select depot and carrier like any other job.&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select product to deliver to the selected technician - this job type will be limited to just selecting van stock and entering the quantity. This will be exactly as the process selects van stock now as shown above. This involves identifying the product (through part search), selecting the product (including the store from which the product is sourced, which may be a depot store or outside store) and confirming the quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The job can then be booked to a technician to transport the product to the technician that needs it – this will be as per the normal booking process. This will be added to the transporting technician's work load, or a new work load created for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Outside Stores ==&lt;br /&gt;
All depots and hubs are stock holding locations. There are also satellite stock holding locations linked to depots, as well as stock held at customers’ depots (BRANCH locations) or at an agreed third-party location (like in a container).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When searching for products to sell, these can be sourced at any of these outside locations as well as at the depot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting tyres to install, the user can also select the store from which the tyre is to be picked up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will check the store of the tyre selected against any set up outside store (OS_STORE) locations set up in CTMS. If the location is set up, then the location will be used as the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location of that order, instead of the depot location. This will be displayed on the left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will not allow selection of parts from any other location other than that outside store if it exists. &lt;br /&gt;
Note that the screen will allow selection of products from multiple stores if they do not have a corresponding outside store location set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, for example, if there are three stores for SL67:&lt;br /&gt;
*	BMAIN – the depot&lt;br /&gt;
*	BCONTAINER – a container at the depot&lt;br /&gt;
*	OSSTORE1 – an off-depot location 3 miles away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OSSTORE1 is setup in CTMS as an OS_STORE location, whereas the others are not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an order, the user can select multiple tyres from both BMAIN and BCONTAINER together on the same order, as they are both considered to be located at the same place (the depot). They cannot also select product from OSSTORE1 on the same order.&lt;br /&gt;
The order will be considered to be starting at the depot location SL67.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a different order, the user can select multiple tyres from OSSTORE1. They cannot select any tyres from BMAIN or BCONTAINER.&lt;br /&gt;
The order will be considered to be starting at the outside store location OSSTORE1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Examples of Depot Locations and Outside Stores ==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from SL67 to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL67:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from OSSL117 (outside store based at SL117) to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at OSSL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from SL67 to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from OSSTORE1 to a roadside location OMS1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at OSSTORE1&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at OMS1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access Control and Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be set up through access control for access of CTMS and CTL systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The users should be assigned to an access control group – see standard functionality guides on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users should have parameters set against them, especially the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*	The existing BASED_AT will define the Central Tyre depot to which they have been assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
*	If the user should have access to all depots, then the ALL_DEPOTS parameter should be set instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CTL users must have access to the CTL menus through their assigned group (typically CTL):&lt;br /&gt;
*	FIA Reports - CTL-04-REP.CTL-04-REP-02&lt;br /&gt;
*	Maintenance - CTL.CTL-01-MNT&lt;br /&gt;
*	Process - CTL.CTL-03-ORD&lt;br /&gt;
*	Reports - CTL.CTL-04-REP&lt;br /&gt;
*	Root Menu - CTL.CTL-99-CTL&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tasks - CTL.CTL-02-TSK&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Call Logging - CTL-03-ORD.CTL-02-ORD-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Axle Configuration - CTL-01-MNT.CTL-01-MNT-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Fleet Maintenance - CTL-02-TSK.CTL-02-TSK-01&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these menus should NOT have &amp;quot;In Menu?&amp;quot; ticked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
External (e.g. ITDN) users also require the following parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
*	A new parameter &amp;quot;EXTERNAL_CALL_LOGGING&amp;quot; will be available. For external users of Call Logging (i.e. ITDN) this parameter should be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When locked to (based at) a single depot and creating a new order the depot (and from location of the order) will be defaulted to that depot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user is set as All Depots or has multiple depots, then the user must select the depot first before the From location is locked to that order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user is set as an external call logging user, the system will restrict the visibility and selection of price against a tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will be hidden when looking up a tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will not be displayed in product details&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will default to the selling price.&lt;br /&gt;
*	There will be no facility to change or enter the price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide|301-{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Call_Logging_-_Tyres&amp;diff=1314</id>
		<title>Call Logging - Tyres</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Call_Logging_-_Tyres&amp;diff=1314"/>
		<updated>2024-07-30T10:48:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Updated contacts section with examples.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This screen allows you to control the booking process of an order, and control the continued contact with the customer to affect a seamless delivery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-FilterMain.png|''Call Logging''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
* Quickly find orders through a variety of criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* See all pertinent information about the customer's order, to aid in responding to customer queries.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add instructions to the driver, including &amp;quot;Call X Minutes Before Arrival&amp;quot; information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Book an order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add additional services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can query orders by entering criteria in the Search panel:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - a drop-down list of all configured parent customers in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer'' - the orders' customer code. You can enter the code directly or use the {{Button|Lookup}} button to find a customer. The screen will display a pop-up customer search window, allowing you to search by ''Name'', ''Address'' or ''Postcode''. You can enter partials of any of these. You can cancel the query by closing the pop-up window, or display matching results by pressing the '''Find''' button. The screen will display a pop-up window of matching customers in a results table. You can return to the customer search window by closing the results window or clicking the '''Cancel''' button. You can select a customer by clicking on the row for that customer. The screen will close both the results and customer search windows and enter the customer code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Depot'' - the depot that owns the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - the order's customer reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Status'' - a drop-down list of all order statuses configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Location'' - the location of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date From'' - the date from which orders are selected. The screen will default this to today's date. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button to select a date. The date cannot be more than 7 days in the past.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date To'' - the date up to which orders are selected. The screen will default this to 10 days into the future. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button to select a date. The date cannot be less than the date from.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type'' - a drop-down list of all order types configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - a drop-down list of all service levels configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reset the query criteria to the default values by clicking the '''Clear''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click the '''Find''' button to execute the query - the screen will display the matching orders in the results table.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Main.png|''Results after filtering''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} The last 10 orders you select will be shown in the Recent Orders list in the Search panel - you can quickly re-select a previous order (regardless of search criteria you now have) by clicking on the order row in this list  - the screen will display the Details panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to display the following fields in the results table (using the {{Button|Column Selector}}:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver PostCode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Postal Region''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To Name''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Type''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Current Location''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Mode''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Active''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Vehicle''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Technician''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Process Id''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Update Counter''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of jobs is colour coded:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Unscheduled/Invalid - Red&lt;br /&gt;
*	Booked/Scheduled - Amber&lt;br /&gt;
*	Complete/Delivered - Green&lt;br /&gt;
*	Failed/cancelled/On-hold - normal white/grey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select an order to view or edit by clicking on the row - the screen will display the Details panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png|''Detail panel, showing common details, details tab and notes''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Details panel is made up of multiple sections:&lt;br /&gt;
* Common order details, situated on the top-left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* Additional details, situated in the top-right of the screen. You can select different detailed information to view or edit using the tab bar provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notes, situated at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create a new order by opening the Details panel and clicking on the {{Button|New}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating or updating a job, the screen will check the credit status limit of the customer selected through the unique customer code. This will check with Elucid directly, and that credit status limit (of the child or parent account) will be used when checking whether products may be fitted, or services rendered. Note that this may also include unposted or incomplete sales invoices / credit notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This check on credit limits also applies when adding new lines to a job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Order Details section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Status'' - the booking status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Ref'' - the TMS order reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - the order's customer reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status'' - the order status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Code'' - the customer of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - the parent customer of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collection'' details, including the address and collection window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Delivery'' details, including the address and delivery window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Weight'' - the total weight of all items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Items'' - the number of items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Volume'' - the total volume of the items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - the order's service level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter or amend the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Driver Instructions'' - any general instructions to the driver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also see:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer instructions'' - any instructions configured against the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Preferred Brand'' - any preferred brand information configured against the custome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also click the {{Button|Run SLA Report}} button to view any additional customer restrictions if configured against the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can save the changed details of the order in this section using the '''Save''' button. The screen will leave the order open for further amendments. If you have finished with the order, you can click the '''Save and Close''' button instead to save the details and close the details window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can refresh the order details using the '''Refresh''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can close the details section without saving any changes using the '''Close''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the following buttons on this tab:&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|New}} - create a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Delete}} - delete an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Help}} - help on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Undo}} - Undo any changes since last save.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Clear}} - clear all fields.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Toggle}} - toggle display of all accordion headers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen allows you to reject (cancel) a job using the {{Button|Delete}} button. In this case, you are requested to enter a reason why this was rejected.&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the call is taken, the user quotes a price to the customer, the customer rejects the price. The job will be captured, but the job will be cancelled with a reason code (e.g. too pricey).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional Details section ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Additional Details section consists of the following tabs:&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Details'' - additional order details information.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Contact'' - customer contact information.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Tyres'' - deliverable tyres and services.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Booking'' - book the dates and times of the job.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Services'' - a facility to add equipment and services to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Trips'' - the booked trip for the job, in terms of pickup and drop-off times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Details tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you enter all of the details for a new order, or amend details for an existing order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png|''Details tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - generated automatically by the system when the job is saved.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Breakdown Ref'' - a third-party reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Authorisation Code'' - required authorisation code from the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - the parent customer. A lookup is provided with search criteria. If a parent customer is selected, this will filter the Customer lookup. If you enter a customer first, the Invoice To field will automatically populate.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer'' - the customer. A lookup is provided with search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Actual Customer'' - a text field for reporting purposes - only entered when the customer selected is a &amp;quot;slush account&amp;quot; combining many small customers. This will appear in the customer name on the service report if populated.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Use Planning Region'' - limit the selection of locations to those your user is allowed to see.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Location'' - the job location. A lookup is provided. The lookup will show only the addresses for that customer, and optionally only those within your user's configured planning region.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Depot'' - the owning depot of the job - this will default to your configured depot. A lookup is provided. The lookup will sort based on the distance away from the callout location, and this distance is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Carrier'' - the depot executing the job. This will default to your configured depot. A lookup is provided. The lookup will sort based on the distance away from the callout location, and this distance is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - the service level. A drop-down list of service levels is provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg No/Fleet No'' - the vehicle being serviced for non-fleet inspection jobs. A lookup is provided with search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the call-out is not at a known address, the user can search for and select a location from the map, which will create a new location for the job and customer. There are editing facilities to the address after selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also add a new vehicle for this customer and location using the {{Button|New Vehicle}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
You will be prompted to enter:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg No/Fleet No'': This is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Vehicle Type'': This is required. You can select from a drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description'': This is freetext and optional.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Axle Configuration'': This is optional. See notes below.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Fleet Location'': This will default to the fleet location selected as the job destination location. You can change this through the lookup provided.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|&lt;br /&gt;
* Once a vehicle is created without a configuration in the call logging screen, this vehicle cannot then be amended in this screen to add the configuration. The Vehicle Fleet Maintenance screen can be used to modify the vehicle and add a configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
* The selected vehicle may now not have an axle configuration against it, so the tyre positions will not be known. In this case, the screen will check and will only allow van stock to be booked if the vehicle does not have an axle configuration associated to it.&lt;br /&gt;
* If fitment of new or other tyres, or services are to be installed on the vehicle, then you should write the position and required work in the notes, so that the technician can see them and do the work required. Tyres should be booked as van stock if required.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have added these details and saved, you can move on to other details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contact tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab shows all of the end customer contact information for the order in a table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Contacts.png|''Contacts tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Contacts - any contacts you have added or amended against this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Location Contacts - pre-saved contacts against the from location, to location or against the customer's default (billing or invoice) location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{Button|New Order Contact}} button will create a new order contact in the table below. You can also save this new contact to the location for re-use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location contacts are preconfigured for contact preferences:&lt;br /&gt;
* Report - use this contact to email the completed service report.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tracking - use this contact to email tracking emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, order contacts can be specified for Text, which will send the phone information against that contact to the EPOD system, so the technician can contact the customer directly via text or phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any location contacts that are checked will be used - if you want to change that, select the contact and save as an order contact, and change the contact preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the contacts used against an order, click on it in the bottom Location Contacts list and save - this will save this as an Order Contact (which will over-ride the Location contacts). They you can change the check boxes against the order contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any location contacts that have been overridden in order contacts will be indicated by the row being greyed out - you will not be able to select that location contact again unless you delete the order contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to email the completion report to all contacts that have been defaulted as &amp;quot;Report&amp;quot; against the order and locations, you don't have to change anything - all of the emails against those ticked contacts will be sent to EPOD for the sending of the completion report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to add a contact JUST FOR THIS ORDER ONLY, click the {{Button|New Order Contact}} button and enter the details. Do not check the &amp;quot;Save as Location&amp;quot; check box and click {{Button|Save}}. This will create a new order contact, for this order only, and will appear just in the Order Contacts table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to add a contact for any orders to this location from this point forwards, click the {{Button|New Order Contact}} button and enter the details. Check the &amp;quot;Save as Location&amp;quot; check box and click {{Button|Save}}. This will create a new Order Contact, for this order only. This contact will appear in the Order Contacts table, and also in the Location Contacts table below, but greyed out (as there is an Order Contact over-riding it).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change a contact so that it doesn't send the report from this point forward for any jobs, select the contact in the Location Contacts table, then untick the Report box and click {{Button|Save}}. This will update the location contact. This will also create this as an order contact, so you can change it on this order alone if you want to - the Location Contact will be greyed out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change a contact so that it doesn't send the report FOR THIS ORDER ONLY, select the contact in the Location Contacts table and click {{Button|Save}} - that will create an order contact. Then select the Order Contact and untick the Report box and click {{Button|Save}}. This will update the order contact only and over-ride the location contact. The contact will be greyed out in the Location Contacts section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tyres tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays the summary of types of items on the order (the order lines) and can display each individual order item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays the order summary (lines) in a table with the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Work Type'' - one of Fit New, Fit Other, Services Only, Van Stock, Removal.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Position''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Services'' - popup to show services booked on this line.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Product''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Store''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Quantity''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Price''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres3.png|''Tyres panel''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click on an existing tyre to edit it, or add a new tyre with the {{Button|New}} button. In both cases, the screen will display the Items popup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be allowed to select the type of work being booked to a job when selecting tyres:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fit New&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fit Other&lt;br /&gt;
*	Services Only&lt;br /&gt;
*	Van Stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general, most deliverables work the same way:&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a vehicle position&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a product using the Part Search lookup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-PartSearch1.png|''Part Search Parameters''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Search allows you to select parameters for the search - they are matched partially:&lt;br /&gt;
* Product&lt;br /&gt;
* Depot&lt;br /&gt;
* Description&lt;br /&gt;
* Manufacturer&lt;br /&gt;
The screen also displays the nearest stock holding location, for information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching parts are displayed, and you can select the part you need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-PartSearch2.png|''Part Search Results''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Fit New:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Select a depot and position.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Search for a part using the part search.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Once selected, all of the details are displayed, and the quantity is defaulted to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres2.png|''Fit New''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Work Type	Option select one, default to Fit New&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Defaulted&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Lookup - part search&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Set from product, can be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product -label changed to Diameter&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On clicking save, the screen will add a tyre to the selected tyres and display the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If new tyres are to be installed on the vehicle, then the user should book van stock against the job and write the position in the notes, so that the technician can see them and do the work required. Tyres should be booked as van stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Services Only, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-ServicesOnly.png|''Services Only''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Not enabled, as not selecting a product to sell&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will also show all services that can be supplied to that vehicle type that are related to a tyre position. The user must select at least one of these services, although several can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On saving, the service supplied will be saved and displayed in the booked work list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Van Stock, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-VanStock.png|''Van Stock''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Default to depot, select from drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Lookup - part search&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Must be entered with a quantity greater than 0&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On clicking save, the screen will add the selected quantity of tyres and display the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Fit Other, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-FitOther.png|''Fit Other''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Part search, but just for product, not store, can be left blank&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Blank&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The part search in this instance will be searching for any product code, not specifically those sold by the depot, just any known product, as this is intended to allow the user to book customer-owned product rather that sell them a tyre from depot stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will also show all services that can be supplied to that vehicle type that are related to a tyre position. The user must select at least one of these services, although several can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Booking tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to modify the delivery date of the order based on the customer's requirements, and to select the technician and vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Booking.png|''Booking tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can manually set a booking date and time window here. This will default to today’s date, and to the expected delivery time, based on the service level. For example, if the time is 1200, and the service level is 60-90 minutes, the book time will default to 1330.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a job is created, a service level will be identified. This, along with the start/booked time, will determine the window for the job. For example, &amp;quot;60-90 minutes&amp;quot; may be a service level. If the job is booked at the correct time of 1200, the window will be 1200-1330. &lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, scheduled jobs will typically be scheduled at 0600 on the day and will be able to be completed at any time of the day.&lt;br /&gt;
This will be used to determine whether the job was completed in time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will list the Technicians assigned to that selected carrier. The screen provides decision assistance to the operator to select the correct Technician. &lt;br /&gt;
The screen will use the current workload assigned to the Technician, how long they have been working on it, how long the job is expected to take and the current location of the Technician and progress through the current job and distance to the job in question to determine the potential arrival time. The screen will also show the shifts on which the technician is assigned, to aid in identifying the out-of-hours technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system uses the hub location of the technician to determine travel time. It also uses the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;to&amp;quot; locations of the order to determine the travel time from the hub location, to the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location (to pick up product) and then to the “to” location. The system uses average loading/fitment times depending on the number of tyres selected to determine the length of a job and factors this in, along with ETAs from the device if the job is in progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the order may now be booked from an outside store location, this is the location that is used to calculate the ETA of the technician at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current job will be determined by the job in progress on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
The current location will be determined from the device location.&lt;br /&gt;
The length of the job will be determined from the actions taking place or items being delivered. This will be configured against the line type, with each configured for a number of minutes per item. There are expected to be 3:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Fitment – for example, 15 minute per tyre fitted once the location is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Supply – for example, one minute per tyre being delivered.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Inspection – for example, 5 minutes per vehicle to be inspected, with the quantity of the line set to the number of vehicles, to give finer control of how long the job is expected to be.&lt;br /&gt;
If the driver arrived 5 minutes ago, and the job is expected to take 30 minutes based on these calculations, the system will know that there is an expected 25 minutes remaining on that job before they can depart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will indicate the availability of that driver, using the assigned shift and resource availability calendar to determine whether the driver may be used. As noted, this is decision assistance - the driver may still be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may then assign the technician's van, if required. If the technician has a default vehicle or is already working in a van, then this will be defaulted to that van. You can change the van here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once selected, click the {{Button|Book}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the technician or vehicle, click the {{Button|Release}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the call is logged, booked and assigned to the driver, the job will be planned onto the technician's workload and sent over to their device. This will generate a workload on the device (if one does not already exist), a collection job (if picking up van stock or installing a new tyre) and a service job of the type specified to do the work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a job is booked to a technician for the first job of that day, the system creates a workload for that technician, starting at the start-up time of that driver's shift, then factoring in the time as above from the specified start time of the job, to determine the ETA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the driver has a specific hub location (i.e. does not work directly in the carrier hub location), the system will use that specific hub location to determine the start and end points of the trip and therefore the travel time to the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Services tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to view set any additional equipment or services against the order. You can select from a drop-down list of configured services or equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Services.png|''Services tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For completed jobs, the services supplied against the job will be visible here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have selected the service or equipment, you can set the quantity and add it using the {{Button|New}} button provided. The screen will add this to the displayed list of equipment and services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trips tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display any trips onto which the order has been planned, showing all pickup and drop-off stops. You can use this information to quickly answer queries from the customer as to the planning status and progress of the delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Trips.png|''Trips tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display this information in a trips table, showing the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Trip Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Stop Type''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Location Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Location Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Planned''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Actual''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to enter notes against the order. You can see all previously-entered notes in a list, with the most recent on the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several of the actions that you take in this screen will automatically generate notes for you, to provide an audit trail of customer contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also enter any note, by keying the note in the ''Add New Note'' field and clicking the {{Button|Save}} button when you have finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen logs the creation and amendment date, time and user of all entered notes, whether they were entered automatically or manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Top-up Transfers ==&lt;br /&gt;
Top-up Transfers are a job type that allows tyres to be taken to a technician whilst on a job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a job in CTL, a new Job Type will be available called &amp;quot;Top-up Transfer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select this, the screen will allow you to select a technician and an order on which they require additional product – the screen will show the orders on the selected technician's current trip and allow them to select to job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will then copy the basic order details for a new job to transfer product to that technician. That will be customer, destination location, customer vehicle, etc. The job will not be saved automatically – the details will just be copied into the screen for you to save if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select depot and carrier like any other job.&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select product to deliver to the selected technician - this job type will be limited to just selecting van stock and entering the quantity. This will be exactly as the process selects van stock now as shown above. This involves identifying the product (through part search), selecting the product (including the store from which the product is sourced, which may be a depot store or outside store) and confirming the quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The job can then be booked to a technician to transport the product to the technician that needs it – this will be as per the normal booking process. This will be added to the transporting technician's work load, or a new work load created for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Outside Stores ==&lt;br /&gt;
All depots and hubs are stock holding locations. There are also satellite stock holding locations linked to depots, as well as stock held at customers’ depots (BRANCH locations) or at an agreed third-party location (like in a container).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When searching for products to sell, these can be sourced at any of these outside locations as well as at the depot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting tyres to install, the user can also select the store from which the tyre is to be picked up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will check the store of the tyre selected against any set up outside store (OS_STORE) locations set up in CTMS. If the location is set up, then the location will be used as the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location of that order, instead of the depot location. This will be displayed on the left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will not allow selection of parts from any other location other than that outside store if it exists. &lt;br /&gt;
Note that the screen will allow selection of products from multiple stores if they do not have a corresponding outside store location set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, for example, if there are three stores for SL67:&lt;br /&gt;
*	BMAIN – the depot&lt;br /&gt;
*	BCONTAINER – a container at the depot&lt;br /&gt;
*	OSSTORE1 – an off-depot location 3 miles away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OSSTORE1 is setup in CTMS as an OS_STORE location, whereas the others are not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an order, the user can select multiple tyres from both BMAIN and BCONTAINER together on the same order, as they are both considered to be located at the same place (the depot). They cannot also select product from OSSTORE1 on the same order.&lt;br /&gt;
The order will be considered to be starting at the depot location SL67.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a different order, the user can select multiple tyres from OSSTORE1. They cannot select any tyres from BMAIN or BCONTAINER.&lt;br /&gt;
The order will be considered to be starting at the outside store location OSSTORE1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Examples of Depot Locations and Outside Stores ==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from SL67 to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL67:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from OSSL117 (outside store based at SL117) to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at OSSL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from SL67 to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from OSSTORE1 to a roadside location OMS1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at OSSTORE1&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at OMS1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access Control and Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be set up through access control for access of CTMS and CTL systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The users should be assigned to an access control group – see standard functionality guides on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users should have parameters set against them, especially the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*	The existing BASED_AT will define the Central Tyre depot to which they have been assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
*	If the user should have access to all depots, then the ALL_DEPOTS parameter should be set instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CTL users must have access to the CTL menus through their assigned group (typically CTL):&lt;br /&gt;
*	FIA Reports - CTL-04-REP.CTL-04-REP-02&lt;br /&gt;
*	Maintenance - CTL.CTL-01-MNT&lt;br /&gt;
*	Process - CTL.CTL-03-ORD&lt;br /&gt;
*	Reports - CTL.CTL-04-REP&lt;br /&gt;
*	Root Menu - CTL.CTL-99-CTL&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tasks - CTL.CTL-02-TSK&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Call Logging - CTL-03-ORD.CTL-02-ORD-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Axle Configuration - CTL-01-MNT.CTL-01-MNT-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Fleet Maintenance - CTL-02-TSK.CTL-02-TSK-01&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these menus should NOT have &amp;quot;In Menu?&amp;quot; ticked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
External (e.g. ITDN) users also require the following parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
*	A new parameter &amp;quot;EXTERNAL_CALL_LOGGING&amp;quot; will be available. For external users of Call Logging (i.e. ITDN) this parameter should be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When locked to (based at) a single depot and creating a new order the depot (and from location of the order) will be defaulted to that depot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user is set as All Depots or has multiple depots, then the user must select the depot first before the From location is locked to that order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user is set as an external call logging user, the system will restrict the visibility and selection of price against a tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will be hidden when looking up a tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will not be displayed in product details&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will default to the selling price.&lt;br /&gt;
*	There will be no facility to change or enter the price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide|301-{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Call_Logging_-_Tyres&amp;diff=1313</id>
		<title>Call Logging - Tyres</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Call_Logging_-_Tyres&amp;diff=1313"/>
		<updated>2024-06-28T08:48:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Minor correction&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This screen allows you to control the booking process of an order, and control the continued contact with the customer to affect a seamless delivery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-FilterMain.png|''Call Logging''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
* Quickly find orders through a variety of criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* See all pertinent information about the customer's order, to aid in responding to customer queries.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add instructions to the driver, including &amp;quot;Call X Minutes Before Arrival&amp;quot; information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Book an order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add additional services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can query orders by entering criteria in the Search panel:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - a drop-down list of all configured parent customers in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer'' - the orders' customer code. You can enter the code directly or use the {{Button|Lookup}} button to find a customer. The screen will display a pop-up customer search window, allowing you to search by ''Name'', ''Address'' or ''Postcode''. You can enter partials of any of these. You can cancel the query by closing the pop-up window, or display matching results by pressing the '''Find''' button. The screen will display a pop-up window of matching customers in a results table. You can return to the customer search window by closing the results window or clicking the '''Cancel''' button. You can select a customer by clicking on the row for that customer. The screen will close both the results and customer search windows and enter the customer code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Depot'' - the depot that owns the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - the order's customer reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Status'' - a drop-down list of all order statuses configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Location'' - the location of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date From'' - the date from which orders are selected. The screen will default this to today's date. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button to select a date. The date cannot be more than 7 days in the past.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date To'' - the date up to which orders are selected. The screen will default this to 10 days into the future. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button to select a date. The date cannot be less than the date from.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type'' - a drop-down list of all order types configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - a drop-down list of all service levels configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reset the query criteria to the default values by clicking the '''Clear''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click the '''Find''' button to execute the query - the screen will display the matching orders in the results table.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Main.png|''Results after filtering''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} The last 10 orders you select will be shown in the Recent Orders list in the Search panel - you can quickly re-select a previous order (regardless of search criteria you now have) by clicking on the order row in this list  - the screen will display the Details panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to display the following fields in the results table (using the {{Button|Column Selector}}:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver PostCode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Postal Region''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To Name''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Type''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Current Location''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Mode''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Active''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Vehicle''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Technician''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Process Id''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Update Counter''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of jobs is colour coded:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Unscheduled/Invalid - Red&lt;br /&gt;
*	Booked/Scheduled - Amber&lt;br /&gt;
*	Complete/Delivered - Green&lt;br /&gt;
*	Failed/cancelled/On-hold - normal white/grey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select an order to view or edit by clicking on the row - the screen will display the Details panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png|''Detail panel, showing common details, details tab and notes''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Details panel is made up of multiple sections:&lt;br /&gt;
* Common order details, situated on the top-left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* Additional details, situated in the top-right of the screen. You can select different detailed information to view or edit using the tab bar provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notes, situated at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create a new order by opening the Details panel and clicking on the {{Button|New}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating or updating a job, the screen will check the credit status limit of the customer selected through the unique customer code. This will check with Elucid directly, and that credit status limit (of the child or parent account) will be used when checking whether products may be fitted, or services rendered. Note that this may also include unposted or incomplete sales invoices / credit notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This check on credit limits also applies when adding new lines to a job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Order Details section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Status'' - the booking status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Ref'' - the TMS order reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - the order's customer reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status'' - the order status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Code'' - the customer of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - the parent customer of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collection'' details, including the address and collection window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Delivery'' details, including the address and delivery window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Weight'' - the total weight of all items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Items'' - the number of items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Volume'' - the total volume of the items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - the order's service level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter or amend the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Driver Instructions'' - any general instructions to the driver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also see:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer instructions'' - any instructions configured against the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Preferred Brand'' - any preferred brand information configured against the custome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also click the {{Button|Run SLA Report}} button to view any additional customer restrictions if configured against the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can save the changed details of the order in this section using the '''Save''' button. The screen will leave the order open for further amendments. If you have finished with the order, you can click the '''Save and Close''' button instead to save the details and close the details window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can refresh the order details using the '''Refresh''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can close the details section without saving any changes using the '''Close''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the following buttons on this tab:&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|New}} - create a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Delete}} - delete an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Help}} - help on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Undo}} - Undo any changes since last save.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Clear}} - clear all fields.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Toggle}} - toggle display of all accordion headers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen allows you to reject (cancel) a job using the {{Button|Delete}} button. In this case, you are requested to enter a reason why this was rejected.&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the call is taken, the user quotes a price to the customer, the customer rejects the price. The job will be captured, but the job will be cancelled with a reason code (e.g. too pricey).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional Details section ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Additional Details section consists of the following tabs:&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Details'' - additional order details information.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Contact'' - customer contact information.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Tyres'' - deliverable tyres and services.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Booking'' - book the dates and times of the job.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Services'' - a facility to add equipment and services to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Trips'' - the booked trip for the job, in terms of pickup and drop-off times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Details tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you enter all of the details for a new order, or amend details for an existing order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png|''Details tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - generated automatically by the system when the job is saved.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Breakdown Ref'' - a third-party reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Authorisation Code'' - required authorisation code from the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - the parent customer. A lookup is provided with search criteria. If a parent customer is selected, this will filter the Customer lookup. If you enter a customer first, the Invoice To field will automatically populate.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer'' - the customer. A lookup is provided with search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Actual Customer'' - a text field for reporting purposes - only entered when the customer selected is a &amp;quot;slush account&amp;quot; combining many small customers. This will appear in the customer name on the service report if populated.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Use Planning Region'' - limit the selection of locations to those your user is allowed to see.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Location'' - the job location. A lookup is provided. The lookup will show only the addresses for that customer, and optionally only those within your user's configured planning region.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Depot'' - the owning depot of the job - this will default to your configured depot. A lookup is provided. The lookup will sort based on the distance away from the callout location, and this distance is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Carrier'' - the depot executing the job. This will default to your configured depot. A lookup is provided. The lookup will sort based on the distance away from the callout location, and this distance is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - the service level. A drop-down list of service levels is provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg No/Fleet No'' - the vehicle being serviced for non-fleet inspection jobs. A lookup is provided with search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the call-out is not at a known address, the user can search for and select a location from the map, which will create a new location for the job and customer. There are editing facilities to the address after selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also add a new vehicle for this customer and location using the {{Button|New Vehicle}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
You will be prompted to enter:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg No/Fleet No'': This is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Vehicle Type'': This is required. You can select from a drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description'': This is freetext and optional.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Axle Configuration'': This is optional. See notes below.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Fleet Location'': This will default to the fleet location selected as the job destination location. You can change this through the lookup provided.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|&lt;br /&gt;
* Once a vehicle is created without a configuration in the call logging screen, this vehicle cannot then be amended in this screen to add the configuration. The Vehicle Fleet Maintenance screen can be used to modify the vehicle and add a configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
* The selected vehicle may now not have an axle configuration against it, so the tyre positions will not be known. In this case, the screen will check and will only allow van stock to be booked if the vehicle does not have an axle configuration associated to it.&lt;br /&gt;
* If fitment of new or other tyres, or services are to be installed on the vehicle, then you should write the position and required work in the notes, so that the technician can see them and do the work required. Tyres should be booked as van stock if required.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have added these details and saved, you can move on to other details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contact tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab shows all of the end customer contact information for the order in a table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Contacts.png|''Contacts tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Contacts - any contacts you have added or amended against this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Location Contacts - pre-saved contacts against the location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{Button|New Order Contact}} button will create a new order contact in the table below. You can also save this new contact to the location for re-use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location contacts are preconfigured for contact preferences:&lt;br /&gt;
* Report - use this contact to email the completed service report.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tracking - use this contact to email tracking emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, order contacts can be specified for Text, which will send the phone information against that contact to the EPOD system, so the technician can contact the customer directly via text or phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any location contacts that are checked will be used - if you want to change that, select the contact and save as an order contact, and change the contact preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tyres tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays the summary of types of items on the order (the order lines) and can display each individual order item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays the order summary (lines) in a table with the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Work Type'' - one of Fit New, Fit Other, Services Only, Van Stock, Removal.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Position''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Services'' - popup to show services booked on this line.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Product''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Store''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Quantity''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Price''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres3.png|''Tyres panel''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click on an existing tyre to edit it, or add a new tyre with the {{Button|New}} button. In both cases, the screen will display the Items popup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be allowed to select the type of work being booked to a job when selecting tyres:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fit New&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fit Other&lt;br /&gt;
*	Services Only&lt;br /&gt;
*	Van Stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general, most deliverables work the same way:&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a vehicle position&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a product using the Part Search lookup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-PartSearch1.png|''Part Search Parameters''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Search allows you to select parameters for the search - they are matched partially:&lt;br /&gt;
* Product&lt;br /&gt;
* Depot&lt;br /&gt;
* Description&lt;br /&gt;
* Manufacturer&lt;br /&gt;
The screen also displays the nearest stock holding location, for information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching parts are displayed, and you can select the part you need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-PartSearch2.png|''Part Search Results''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Fit New:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Select a depot and position.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Search for a part using the part search.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Once selected, all of the details are displayed, and the quantity is defaulted to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres2.png|''Fit New''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Work Type	Option select one, default to Fit New&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Defaulted&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Lookup - part search&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Set from product, can be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product -label changed to Diameter&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On clicking save, the screen will add a tyre to the selected tyres and display the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If new tyres are to be installed on the vehicle, then the user should book van stock against the job and write the position in the notes, so that the technician can see them and do the work required. Tyres should be booked as van stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Services Only, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-ServicesOnly.png|''Services Only''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Not enabled, as not selecting a product to sell&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will also show all services that can be supplied to that vehicle type that are related to a tyre position. The user must select at least one of these services, although several can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On saving, the service supplied will be saved and displayed in the booked work list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Van Stock, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-VanStock.png|''Van Stock''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Default to depot, select from drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Lookup - part search&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Must be entered with a quantity greater than 0&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On clicking save, the screen will add the selected quantity of tyres and display the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Fit Other, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-FitOther.png|''Fit Other''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Part search, but just for product, not store, can be left blank&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Blank&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The part search in this instance will be searching for any product code, not specifically those sold by the depot, just any known product, as this is intended to allow the user to book customer-owned product rather that sell them a tyre from depot stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will also show all services that can be supplied to that vehicle type that are related to a tyre position. The user must select at least one of these services, although several can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Booking tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to modify the delivery date of the order based on the customer's requirements, and to select the technician and vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Booking.png|''Booking tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can manually set a booking date and time window here. This will default to today’s date, and to the expected delivery time, based on the service level. For example, if the time is 1200, and the service level is 60-90 minutes, the book time will default to 1330.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a job is created, a service level will be identified. This, along with the start/booked time, will determine the window for the job. For example, &amp;quot;60-90 minutes&amp;quot; may be a service level. If the job is booked at the correct time of 1200, the window will be 1200-1330. &lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, scheduled jobs will typically be scheduled at 0600 on the day and will be able to be completed at any time of the day.&lt;br /&gt;
This will be used to determine whether the job was completed in time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will list the Technicians assigned to that selected carrier. The screen provides decision assistance to the operator to select the correct Technician. &lt;br /&gt;
The screen will use the current workload assigned to the Technician, how long they have been working on it, how long the job is expected to take and the current location of the Technician and progress through the current job and distance to the job in question to determine the potential arrival time. The screen will also show the shifts on which the technician is assigned, to aid in identifying the out-of-hours technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system uses the hub location of the technician to determine travel time. It also uses the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;to&amp;quot; locations of the order to determine the travel time from the hub location, to the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location (to pick up product) and then to the “to” location. The system uses average loading/fitment times depending on the number of tyres selected to determine the length of a job and factors this in, along with ETAs from the device if the job is in progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the order may now be booked from an outside store location, this is the location that is used to calculate the ETA of the technician at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current job will be determined by the job in progress on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
The current location will be determined from the device location.&lt;br /&gt;
The length of the job will be determined from the actions taking place or items being delivered. This will be configured against the line type, with each configured for a number of minutes per item. There are expected to be 3:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Fitment – for example, 15 minute per tyre fitted once the location is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Supply – for example, one minute per tyre being delivered.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Inspection – for example, 5 minutes per vehicle to be inspected, with the quantity of the line set to the number of vehicles, to give finer control of how long the job is expected to be.&lt;br /&gt;
If the driver arrived 5 minutes ago, and the job is expected to take 30 minutes based on these calculations, the system will know that there is an expected 25 minutes remaining on that job before they can depart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will indicate the availability of that driver, using the assigned shift and resource availability calendar to determine whether the driver may be used. As noted, this is decision assistance - the driver may still be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may then assign the technician's van, if required. If the technician has a default vehicle or is already working in a van, then this will be defaulted to that van. You can change the van here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once selected, click the {{Button|Book}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the technician or vehicle, click the {{Button|Release}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the call is logged, booked and assigned to the driver, the job will be planned onto the technician's workload and sent over to their device. This will generate a workload on the device (if one does not already exist), a collection job (if picking up van stock or installing a new tyre) and a service job of the type specified to do the work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a job is booked to a technician for the first job of that day, the system creates a workload for that technician, starting at the start-up time of that driver's shift, then factoring in the time as above from the specified start time of the job, to determine the ETA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the driver has a specific hub location (i.e. does not work directly in the carrier hub location), the system will use that specific hub location to determine the start and end points of the trip and therefore the travel time to the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Services tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to view set any additional equipment or services against the order. You can select from a drop-down list of configured services or equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Services.png|''Services tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For completed jobs, the services supplied against the job will be visible here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have selected the service or equipment, you can set the quantity and add it using the {{Button|New}} button provided. The screen will add this to the displayed list of equipment and services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trips tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display any trips onto which the order has been planned, showing all pickup and drop-off stops. You can use this information to quickly answer queries from the customer as to the planning status and progress of the delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Trips.png|''Trips tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display this information in a trips table, showing the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Trip Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Stop Type''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Location Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Location Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Planned''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Actual''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to enter notes against the order. You can see all previously-entered notes in a list, with the most recent on the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several of the actions that you take in this screen will automatically generate notes for you, to provide an audit trail of customer contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also enter any note, by keying the note in the ''Add New Note'' field and clicking the {{Button|Save}} button when you have finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen logs the creation and amendment date, time and user of all entered notes, whether they were entered automatically or manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Top-up Transfers ==&lt;br /&gt;
Top-up Transfers are a job type that allows tyres to be taken to a technician whilst on a job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a job in CTL, a new Job Type will be available called &amp;quot;Top-up Transfer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select this, the screen will allow you to select a technician and an order on which they require additional product – the screen will show the orders on the selected technician's current trip and allow them to select to job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will then copy the basic order details for a new job to transfer product to that technician. That will be customer, destination location, customer vehicle, etc. The job will not be saved automatically – the details will just be copied into the screen for you to save if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select depot and carrier like any other job.&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select product to deliver to the selected technician - this job type will be limited to just selecting van stock and entering the quantity. This will be exactly as the process selects van stock now as shown above. This involves identifying the product (through part search), selecting the product (including the store from which the product is sourced, which may be a depot store or outside store) and confirming the quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The job can then be booked to a technician to transport the product to the technician that needs it – this will be as per the normal booking process. This will be added to the transporting technician's work load, or a new work load created for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Outside Stores ==&lt;br /&gt;
All depots and hubs are stock holding locations. There are also satellite stock holding locations linked to depots, as well as stock held at customers’ depots (BRANCH locations) or at an agreed third-party location (like in a container).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When searching for products to sell, these can be sourced at any of these outside locations as well as at the depot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting tyres to install, the user can also select the store from which the tyre is to be picked up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will check the store of the tyre selected against any set up outside store (OS_STORE) locations set up in CTMS. If the location is set up, then the location will be used as the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location of that order, instead of the depot location. This will be displayed on the left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will not allow selection of parts from any other location other than that outside store if it exists. &lt;br /&gt;
Note that the screen will allow selection of products from multiple stores if they do not have a corresponding outside store location set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, for example, if there are three stores for SL67:&lt;br /&gt;
*	BMAIN – the depot&lt;br /&gt;
*	BCONTAINER – a container at the depot&lt;br /&gt;
*	OSSTORE1 – an off-depot location 3 miles away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OSSTORE1 is setup in CTMS as an OS_STORE location, whereas the others are not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an order, the user can select multiple tyres from both BMAIN and BCONTAINER together on the same order, as they are both considered to be located at the same place (the depot). They cannot also select product from OSSTORE1 on the same order.&lt;br /&gt;
The order will be considered to be starting at the depot location SL67.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a different order, the user can select multiple tyres from OSSTORE1. They cannot select any tyres from BMAIN or BCONTAINER.&lt;br /&gt;
The order will be considered to be starting at the outside store location OSSTORE1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Examples of Depot Locations and Outside Stores ==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from SL67 to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL67:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from OSSL117 (outside store based at SL117) to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at OSSL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from SL67 to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from OSSTORE1 to a roadside location OMS1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at OSSTORE1&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at OMS1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access Control and Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be set up through access control for access of CTMS and CTL systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The users should be assigned to an access control group – see standard functionality guides on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users should have parameters set against them, especially the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*	The existing BASED_AT will define the Central Tyre depot to which they have been assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
*	If the user should have access to all depots, then the ALL_DEPOTS parameter should be set instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CTL users must have access to the CTL menus through their assigned group (typically CTL):&lt;br /&gt;
*	FIA Reports - CTL-04-REP.CTL-04-REP-02&lt;br /&gt;
*	Maintenance - CTL.CTL-01-MNT&lt;br /&gt;
*	Process - CTL.CTL-03-ORD&lt;br /&gt;
*	Reports - CTL.CTL-04-REP&lt;br /&gt;
*	Root Menu - CTL.CTL-99-CTL&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tasks - CTL.CTL-02-TSK&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Call Logging - CTL-03-ORD.CTL-02-ORD-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Axle Configuration - CTL-01-MNT.CTL-01-MNT-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Fleet Maintenance - CTL-02-TSK.CTL-02-TSK-01&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these menus should NOT have &amp;quot;In Menu?&amp;quot; ticked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
External (e.g. ITDN) users also require the following parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
*	A new parameter &amp;quot;EXTERNAL_CALL_LOGGING&amp;quot; will be available. For external users of Call Logging (i.e. ITDN) this parameter should be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When locked to (based at) a single depot and creating a new order the depot (and from location of the order) will be defaulted to that depot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user is set as All Depots or has multiple depots, then the user must select the depot first before the From location is locked to that order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user is set as an external call logging user, the system will restrict the visibility and selection of price against a tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will be hidden when looking up a tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will not be displayed in product details&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will default to the selling price.&lt;br /&gt;
*	There will be no facility to change or enter the price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide|301-{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Call_Logging_-_Tyres&amp;diff=1312</id>
		<title>Call Logging - Tyres</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Call_Logging_-_Tyres&amp;diff=1312"/>
		<updated>2024-06-12T13:52:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Added details of external users and control tower users. Also access control.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This screen allows you to control the booking process of an order, and control the continued contact with the customer to affect a seamless delivery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-FilterMain.png|''Call Logging''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
* Quickly find orders through a variety of criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* See all pertinent information about the customer's order, to aid in responding to customer queries.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add instructions to the driver, including &amp;quot;Call X Minutes Before Arrival&amp;quot; information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Book an order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add additional services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can query orders by entering criteria in the Search panel:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - a drop-down list of all configured parent customers in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer'' - the orders' customer code. You can enter the code directly or use the {{Button|Lookup}} button to find a customer. The screen will display a pop-up customer search window, allowing you to search by ''Name'', ''Address'' or ''Postcode''. You can enter partials of any of these. You can cancel the query by closing the pop-up window, or display matching results by pressing the '''Find''' button. The screen will display a pop-up window of matching customers in a results table. You can return to the customer search window by closing the results window or clicking the '''Cancel''' button. You can select a customer by clicking on the row for that customer. The screen will close both the results and customer search windows and enter the customer code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Depot'' - the depot that owns the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - the order's customer reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Status'' - a drop-down list of all order statuses configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Location'' - the location of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date From'' - the date from which orders are selected. The screen will default this to today's date. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button to select a date. The date cannot be more than 7 days in the past.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date To'' - the date up to which orders are selected. The screen will default this to 10 days into the future. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button to select a date. The date cannot be less than the date from.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type'' - a drop-down list of all order types configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - a drop-down list of all service levels configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reset the query criteria to the default values by clicking the '''Clear''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click the '''Find''' button to execute the query - the screen will display the matching orders in the results table.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Main.png|''Results after filtering''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} The last 10 orders you select will be shown in the Recent Orders list in the Search panel - you can quickly re-select a previous order (regardless of search criteria you now have) by clicking on the order row in this list  - the screen will display the Details panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to display the following fields in the results table (using the {{Button|Column Selector}}:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver PostCode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Postal Region''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To Name''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Type''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Current Location''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Mode''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Active''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Vehicle''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Technician''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Process Id''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Update Counter''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of jobs is colour coded:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Unscheduled/Invalid - Red&lt;br /&gt;
*	Booked/Scheduled - Amber&lt;br /&gt;
*	Complete/Delivered - Green&lt;br /&gt;
*	Failed/cancelled/On-hold - normal white/grey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select an order to view or edit by clicking on the row - the screen will display the Details panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png|''Detail panel, showing common details, details tab and notes''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Details panel is made up of multiple sections:&lt;br /&gt;
* Common order details, situated on the top-left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* Additional details, situated in the top-right of the screen. You can select different detailed information to view or edit using the tab bar provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notes, situated at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create a new order by opening the Details panel and clicking on the {{Button|New}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating or updating a job, the screen will check the credit status limit of the customer selected through the unique customer code. This will check with Elucid directly, and that credit status limit (of the child or parent account) will be used when checking whether products may be fitted, or services rendered. Note that this may also include unposted or incomplete sales invoices / credit notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This check on credit limits also applies when adding new lines to a job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Order Details section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Status'' - the booking status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Ref'' - the TMS order reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - the order's customer reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status'' - the order status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Code'' - the customer of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - the parent customer of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collection'' details, including the address and collection window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Delivery'' details, including the address and delivery window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Weight'' - the total weight of all items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Items'' - the number of items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Volume'' - the total volume of the items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - the order's service level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter or amend the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Driver Instructions'' - any general instructions to the driver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also see:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer instructions'' - any instructions configured against the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Preferred Brand'' - any preferred brand information configured against the custome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also click the {{Button|Run SLA Report}} button to view any additional customer restrictions if configured against the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can save the changed details of the order in this section using the '''Save''' button. The screen will leave the order open for further amendments. If you have finished with the order, you can click the '''Save and Close''' button instead to save the details and close the details window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can refresh the order details using the '''Refresh''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can close the details section without saving any changes using the '''Close''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the following buttons on this tab:&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|New}} - create a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Delete}} - delete an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Help}} - help on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Undo}} - Undo any changes since last save.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Clear}} - clear all fields.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Toggle}} - toggle display of all accordion headers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen allows you to reject (cancel) a job using the {{Button|Delete}} button. In this case, you are requested to enter a reason why this was rejected.&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the call is taken, the user quotes a price to the customer, the customer rejects the price. The job will be captured, but the job will be cancelled with a reason code (e.g. too pricey).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional Details section ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Additional Details section consists of the following tabs:&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Details'' - additional order details information.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Contact'' - customer contact information.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Tyres'' - deliverable tyres and services.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Booking'' - book the dates and times of the job.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Services'' - a facility to add equipment and services to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Trips'' - the booked trip for the job, in terms of pickup and drop-off times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Details tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you enter all of the details for a new order, or amend details for an existing order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png|''Details tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - generated automatically by the system when the job is saved.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Breakdown Ref'' - a third-party reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Authorisation Code'' - required authorisation code from the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - the parent customer. A lookup is provided with search criteria. If a parent customer is selected, this will filter the Customer lookup. If you enter a customer first, the Invoice To field will automatically populate.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer'' - the customer. A lookup is provided with search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Actual Customer'' - a text field for reporting purposes - only entered when the customer selected is a &amp;quot;slush account&amp;quot; combining many small customers. This will appear in the customer name on the service report if populated.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Use Planning Region'' - limit the selection of locations to those your user is allowed to see.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Location'' - the job location. A lookup is provided. The lookup will show only the addresses for that customer, and optionally only those within your user's configured planning region.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Depot'' - the owning depot of the job - this will default to your configured depot. A lookup is provided. The lookup will sort based on the distance away from the callout location, and this distance is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Carrier'' - the depot executing the job. This will default to your configured depot. A lookup is provided. The lookup will sort based on the distance away from the callout location, and this distance is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - the service level. A drop-down list of service levels is provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg No/Fleet No'' - the vehicle being serviced for non-fleet inspection jobs. A lookup is provided with search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the call-out is not at a known address, the user can search for and select a location from the map, which will create a new location for the job and customer. There are editing facilities to the address after selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also add a new vehicle for this customer and location using the {{Button|New Vehicle}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
You will be prompted to enter:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg No/Fleet No'': This is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Vehicle Type'': This is required. You can select from a drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description'': This is freetext and optional.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Axle Configuration'': This is optional. See notes below.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Fleet Location'': This will default to the fleet location selected as the job destination location. You can change this through the lookup provided.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|&lt;br /&gt;
* Once a vehicle is created without a configuration in the call logging screen, this vehicle cannot then be amended in this screen to add the configuration. The Vehicle Fleet Maintenance screen can be used to modify the vehicle and add a configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
* The selected vehicle may now not have an axle configuration against it, so the tyre positions will not be known. In this case, the screen will check and will only allow van stock to be booked if the vehicle does not have an axle configuration associated to it.&lt;br /&gt;
* If fitment of new or other tyres, or services are to be installed on the vehicle, then you should write the position and required work in the notes, so that the technician can see them and do the work required. Tyres should be booked as van stock if required.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have added these details and saved, you can move on to other details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contact tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab shows all of the end customer contact information for the order in a table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Contacts.png|''Contacts tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Contacts - any contacts you have added or amended against this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Location Contacts - pre-saved contacts against the location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{Button|New Order Contact}} button will create a new order contact in the table below. You can also save this new contact to the location for re-use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location contacts are preconfigured for contact preferences:&lt;br /&gt;
* Report - use this contact to email the completed service report.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tracking - use this contact to email tracking emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, order contacts can be specified for Text, which will send the phone information against that contact to the EPOD system, so the technician can contact the customer directly via text or phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any location contacts that are checked will be used - if you want to change that, select the contact and save as an order contact, and change the contact preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tyres tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays the summary of types of items on the order (the order lines) and can display each individual order item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays the order summary (lines) in a table with the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Work Type'' - one of Fit New, Fit Other, Services Only, Van Stock, Removal.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Position''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Services'' - popup to show services booked on this line.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Product''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Store''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Quantity''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Price''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres3.png|''Tyres panel''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click on an existing tyre to edit it, or add a new tyre with the {{Button|New}} button. In both cases, the screen will display the Items popup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be allowed to select the type of work being booked to a job when selecting tyres:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fit New&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fit Other&lt;br /&gt;
*	Services Only&lt;br /&gt;
*	Van Stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general, most deliverables work the same way:&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a vehicle position&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a product using the Part Search lookup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-PartSearch1.png|''Part Search Parameters''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Search allows you to select parameters for the search - they are matched partially:&lt;br /&gt;
* Product&lt;br /&gt;
* Depot&lt;br /&gt;
* Description&lt;br /&gt;
* Manufacturer&lt;br /&gt;
The screen also displays the nearest stock holding location, for information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching parts are displayed, and you can select the part you need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-PartSearch2.png|''Part Search Results''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Fit New:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Select a depot and position.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Search for a part using the part search.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Once selected, all of the details are displayed, and the quantity is defaulted to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres2.png|''Fit New''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Work Type	Option select one, default to Fit New&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Defaulted&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Lookup - part search&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Set from product, can be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product -label changed to Diameter&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On clicking save, the screen will add a tyre to the selected tyres and display the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If new tyres are to be installed on the vehicle, then the user should book van stock against the job and write the position in the notes, so that the technician can see them and do the work required. Tyres should be booked as van stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Services Only, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-ServicesOnly.png|''Services Only''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Not enabled, as not selecting a product to sell&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Default from known product in position or blanknot enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from productNot enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from productNot enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will also show all services that can be supplied to that vehicle type that are related to a tyre position. The user must select at least one of these services, although several can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On saving, the service supplied will be saved and displayed in the booked work list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Van Stock, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-VanStock.png|''Van Stock''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Default to depot, select from drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Lookup - part search&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Must be entered with a quantity greater than 0&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On clicking save, the screen will add the selected quantity of tyres and display the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Fit Other, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-FitOther.png|''Fit Other''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Part search, but just for product, not store, can be left blank&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Blank&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The part search in this instance will be searching for any product code, not specifically those sold by the depot, just any known product, as this is intended to allow the user to book customer-owned product rather that sell them a tyre from depot stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will also show all services that can be supplied to that vehicle type that are related to a tyre position. The user must select at least one of these services, although several can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Booking tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to modify the delivery date of the order based on the customer's requirements, and to select the technician and vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Booking.png|''Booking tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can manually set a booking date and time window here. This will default to today’s date, and to the expected delivery time, based on the service level. For example, if the time is 1200, and the service level is 60-90 minutes, the book time will default to 1330.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a job is created, a service level will be identified. This, along with the start/booked time, will determine the window for the job. For example, &amp;quot;60-90 minutes&amp;quot; may be a service level. If the job is booked at the correct time of 1200, the window will be 1200-1330. &lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, scheduled jobs will typically be scheduled at 0600 on the day and will be able to be completed at any time of the day.&lt;br /&gt;
This will be used to determine whether the job was completed in time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will list the Technicians assigned to that selected carrier. The screen provides decision assistance to the operator to select the correct Technician. &lt;br /&gt;
The screen will use the current workload assigned to the Technician, how long they have been working on it, how long the job is expected to take and the current location of the Technician and progress through the current job and distance to the job in question to determine the potential arrival time. The screen will also show the shifts on which the technician is assigned, to aid in identifying the out-of-hours technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system uses the hub location of the technician to determine travel time. It also uses the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;to&amp;quot; locations of the order to determine the travel time from the hub location, to the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location (to pick up product) and then to the “to” location. The system uses average loading/fitment times depending on the number of tyres selected to determine the length of a job and factors this in, along with ETAs from the device if the job is in progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the order may now be booked from an outside store location, this is the location that is used to calculate the ETA of the technician at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current job will be determined by the job in progress on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
The current location will be determined from the device location.&lt;br /&gt;
The length of the job will be determined from the actions taking place or items being delivered. This will be configured against the line type, with each configured for a number of minutes per item. There are expected to be 3:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Fitment – for example, 15 minute per tyre fitted once the location is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Supply – for example, one minute per tyre being delivered.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Inspection – for example, 5 minutes per vehicle to be inspected, with the quantity of the line set to the number of vehicles, to give finer control of how long the job is expected to be.&lt;br /&gt;
If the driver arrived 5 minutes ago, and the job is expected to take 30 minutes based on these calculations, the system will know that there is an expected 25 minutes remaining on that job before they can depart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will indicate the availability of that driver, using the assigned shift and resource availability calendar to determine whether the driver may be used. As noted, this is decision assistance - the driver may still be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may then assign the technician's van, if required. If the technician has a default vehicle or is already working in a van, then this will be defaulted to that van. You can change the van here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once selected, click the {{Button|Book}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the technician or vehicle, click the {{Button|Release}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the call is logged, booked and assigned to the driver, the job will be planned onto the technician's workload and sent over to their device. This will generate a workload on the device (if one does not already exist), a collection job (if picking up van stock or installing a new tyre) and a service job of the type specified to do the work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a job is booked to a technician for the first job of that day, the system creates a workload for that technician, starting at the start-up time of that driver's shift, then factoring in the time as above from the specified start time of the job, to determine the ETA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the driver has a specific hub location (i.e. does not work directly in the carrier hub location), the system will use that specific hub location to determine the start and end points of the trip and therefore the travel time to the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Services tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to view set any additional equipment or services against the order. You can select from a drop-down list of configured services or equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Services.png|''Services tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For completed jobs, the services supplied against the job will be visible here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have selected the service or equipment, you can set the quantity and add it using the {{Button|New}} button provided. The screen will add this to the displayed list of equipment and services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trips tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display any trips onto which the order has been planned, showing all pickup and drop-off stops. You can use this information to quickly answer queries from the customer as to the planning status and progress of the delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Trips.png|''Trips tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display this information in a trips table, showing the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Trip Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Stop Type''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Location Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Location Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Planned''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Actual''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to enter notes against the order. You can see all previously-entered notes in a list, with the most recent on the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several of the actions that you take in this screen will automatically generate notes for you, to provide an audit trail of customer contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also enter any note, by keying the note in the ''Add New Note'' field and clicking the {{Button|Save}} button when you have finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen logs the creation and amendment date, time and user of all entered notes, whether they were entered automatically or manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Top-up Transfers ==&lt;br /&gt;
Top-up Transfers are a job type that allows tyres to be taken to a technician whilst on a job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a job in CTL, a new Job Type will be available called &amp;quot;Top-up Transfer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select this, the screen will allow you to select a technician and an order on which they require additional product – the screen will show the orders on the selected technician's current trip and allow them to select to job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will then copy the basic order details for a new job to transfer product to that technician. That will be customer, destination location, customer vehicle, etc. The job will not be saved automatically – the details will just be copied into the screen for you to save if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select depot and carrier like any other job.&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select product to deliver to the selected technician - this job type will be limited to just selecting van stock and entering the quantity. This will be exactly as the process selects van stock now as shown above. This involves identifying the product (through part search), selecting the product (including the store from which the product is sourced, which may be a depot store or outside store) and confirming the quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The job can then be booked to a technician to transport the product to the technician that needs it – this will be as per the normal booking process. This will be added to the transporting technician's work load, or a new work load created for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Outside Stores ==&lt;br /&gt;
All depots and hubs are stock holding locations. There are also satellite stock holding locations linked to depots, as well as stock held at customers’ depots (BRANCH locations) or at an agreed third-party location (like in a container).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When searching for products to sell, these can be sourced at any of these outside locations as well as at the depot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting tyres to install, the user can also select the store from which the tyre is to be picked up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will check the store of the tyre selected against any set up outside store (OS_STORE) locations set up in CTMS. If the location is set up, then the location will be used as the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location of that order, instead of the depot location. This will be displayed on the left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will not allow selection of parts from any other location other than that outside store if it exists. &lt;br /&gt;
Note that the screen will allow selection of products from multiple stores if they do not have a corresponding outside store location set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, for example, if there are three stores for SL67:&lt;br /&gt;
*	BMAIN – the depot&lt;br /&gt;
*	BCONTAINER – a container at the depot&lt;br /&gt;
*	OSSTORE1 – an off-depot location 3 miles away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OSSTORE1 is setup in CTMS as an OS_STORE location, whereas the others are not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an order, the user can select multiple tyres from both BMAIN and BCONTAINER together on the same order, as they are both considered to be located at the same place (the depot). They cannot also select product from OSSTORE1 on the same order.&lt;br /&gt;
The order will be considered to be starting at the depot location SL67.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a different order, the user can select multiple tyres from OSSTORE1. They cannot select any tyres from BMAIN or BCONTAINER.&lt;br /&gt;
The order will be considered to be starting at the outside store location OSSTORE1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Examples of Depot Locations and Outside Stores ==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from SL67 to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL67:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from OSSL117 (outside store based at SL117) to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at OSSL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from SL67 to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from OSSTORE1 to a roadside location OMS1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at OSSTORE1&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at OMS1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access Control and Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be set up through access control for access of CTMS and CTL systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The users should be assigned to an access control group – see standard functionality guides on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users should have parameters set against them, especially the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*	The existing BASED_AT will define the Central Tyre depot to which they have been assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
*	If the user should have access to all depots, then the ALL_DEPOTS parameter should be set instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CTL users must have access to the CTL menus through their assigned group (typically CTL):&lt;br /&gt;
*	FIA Reports - CTL-04-REP.CTL-04-REP-02&lt;br /&gt;
*	Maintenance - CTL.CTL-01-MNT&lt;br /&gt;
*	Process - CTL.CTL-03-ORD&lt;br /&gt;
*	Reports - CTL.CTL-04-REP&lt;br /&gt;
*	Root Menu - CTL.CTL-99-CTL&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tasks - CTL.CTL-02-TSK&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Call Logging - CTL-03-ORD.CTL-02-ORD-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Axle Configuration - CTL-01-MNT.CTL-01-MNT-01&lt;br /&gt;
*	Vehicle Fleet Maintenance - CTL-02-TSK.CTL-02-TSK-01&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these menus should NOT have &amp;quot;In Menu?&amp;quot; ticked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
External (e.g. ITDN) users also require the following parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
*	A new parameter &amp;quot;EXTERNAL_CALL_LOGGING&amp;quot; will be available. For external users of Call Logging (i.e. ITDN) this parameter should be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When locked to (based at) a single depot and creating a new order the depot (and from location of the order) will be defaulted to that depot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user is set as All Depots or has multiple depots, then the user must select the depot first before the From location is locked to that order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user is set as an external call logging user, the system will restrict the visibility and selection of price against a tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will be hidden when looking up a tyre.&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will not be displayed in product details&lt;br /&gt;
*	The price will default to the selling price.&lt;br /&gt;
*	There will be no facility to change or enter the price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide|301-{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=UG_440451_CTL-TMS_Vehicle_Fleet_Reference_Guide&amp;diff=1311</id>
		<title>UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=UG_440451_CTL-TMS_Vehicle_Fleet_Reference_Guide&amp;diff=1311"/>
		<updated>2024-06-12T12:51:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Updated with all details of changes to the system after initial development&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Template:Doc_TitleNew&lt;br /&gt;
|Client=Aptean&lt;br /&gt;
|System=''CALIDUS'' Total Logistics TMS&lt;br /&gt;
|Title=CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide&lt;br /&gt;
|Reference=UG 440451&lt;br /&gt;
|Version=1.00&lt;br /&gt;
|Date=12th June 2024&lt;br /&gt;
|Year=2024&lt;br /&gt;
|Type=UG&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide|0]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Call_Logging_-_Tyres&amp;diff=1310</id>
		<title>Call Logging - Tyres</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/CTLTMS/index.php?title=Call_Logging_-_Tyres&amp;diff=1310"/>
		<updated>2024-06-12T12:18:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Anw: Added details of Depot Hub and Outside Stores&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This screen allows you to control the booking process of an order, and control the continued contact with the customer to affect a seamless delivery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-FilterMain.png|''Call Logging''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
* Quickly find orders through a variety of criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* See all pertinent information about the customer's order, to aid in responding to customer queries.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add instructions to the driver, including &amp;quot;Call X Minutes Before Arrival&amp;quot; information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Book an order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add additional services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can query orders by entering criteria in the Search panel:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - a drop-down list of all configured parent customers in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer'' - the orders' customer code. You can enter the code directly or use the {{Button|Lookup}} button to find a customer. The screen will display a pop-up customer search window, allowing you to search by ''Name'', ''Address'' or ''Postcode''. You can enter partials of any of these. You can cancel the query by closing the pop-up window, or display matching results by pressing the '''Find''' button. The screen will display a pop-up window of matching customers in a results table. You can return to the customer search window by closing the results window or clicking the '''Cancel''' button. You can select a customer by clicking on the row for that customer. The screen will close both the results and customer search windows and enter the customer code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Depot'' - the depot that owns the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - the order's customer reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Status'' - a drop-down list of all order statuses configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Location'' - the location of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date From'' - the date from which orders are selected. The screen will default this to today's date. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button to select a date. The date cannot be more than 7 days in the past.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Date To'' - the date up to which orders are selected. The screen will default this to 10 days into the future. You can enter the date directly or use the {{Button|Calendar}} button to select a date. The date cannot be less than the date from.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type'' - a drop-down list of all order types configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - a drop-down list of all service levels configured in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reset the query criteria to the default values by clicking the '''Clear''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click the '''Find''' button to execute the query - the screen will display the matching orders in the results table.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Main.png|''Results after filtering''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note}} The last 10 orders you select will be shown in the Recent Orders list in the Search panel - you can quickly re-select a previous order (regardless of search criteria you now have) by clicking on the order row in this list  - the screen will display the Details panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to display the following fields in the results table (using the {{Button|Column Selector}}:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver To Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver PostCode''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Deliver Postal Region''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To Name''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect From''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collect By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Order Type''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Current Location''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Mode''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Active''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Vehicle''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Technician''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Created Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Updated Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change By''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Active Change Date''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Last Process Id''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Update Counter''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of jobs is colour coded:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Unscheduled/Invalid - Red&lt;br /&gt;
*	Booked/Scheduled - Amber&lt;br /&gt;
*	Complete/Delivered - Green&lt;br /&gt;
*	Failed/cancelled/On-hold - normal white/grey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select an order to view or edit by clicking on the row - the screen will display the Details panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png|''Detail panel, showing common details, details tab and notes''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Details panel is made up of multiple sections:&lt;br /&gt;
* Common order details, situated on the top-left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* Additional details, situated in the top-right of the screen. You can select different detailed information to view or edit using the tab bar provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notes, situated at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create a new order by opening the Details panel and clicking on the {{Button|New}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating or updating a job, the screen will check the credit status limit of the customer selected through the unique customer code. This will check with Elucid directly, and that credit status limit (of the child or parent account) will be used when checking whether products may be fitted, or services rendered. Note that this may also include unposted or incomplete sales invoices / credit notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This check on credit limits also applies when adding new lines to a job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Order Details section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Booking Status'' - the booking status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Ref'' - the TMS order reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - the order's customer reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status'' - the order status.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Code'' - the customer of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - the parent customer of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Collection'' details, including the address and collection window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Delivery'' details, including the address and delivery window.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Weight'' - the total weight of all items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Items'' - the number of items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Volume'' - the total volume of the items on this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - the order's service level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter or amend the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Driver Instructions'' - any general instructions to the driver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also see:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer instructions'' - any instructions configured against the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Preferred Brand'' - any preferred brand information configured against the custome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also click the {{Button|Run SLA Report}} button to view any additional customer restrictions if configured against the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can save the changed details of the order in this section using the '''Save''' button. The screen will leave the order open for further amendments. If you have finished with the order, you can click the '''Save and Close''' button instead to save the details and close the details window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can refresh the order details using the '''Refresh''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can close the details section without saving any changes using the '''Close''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the following buttons on this tab:&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|New}} - create a new record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Delete}} - delete an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Help}} - help on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Undo}} - Undo any changes since last save.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Clear}} - clear all fields.&lt;br /&gt;
* {{Button|Toggle}} - toggle display of all accordion headers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen allows you to reject (cancel) a job using the {{Button|Delete}} button. In this case, you are requested to enter a reason why this was rejected.&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the call is taken, the user quotes a price to the customer, the customer rejects the price. The job will be captured, but the job will be cancelled with a reason code (e.g. too pricey).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional Details section ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Additional Details section consists of the following tabs:&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Details'' - additional order details information.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Contact'' - customer contact information.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Tyres'' - deliverable tyres and services.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Booking'' - book the dates and times of the job.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Services'' - a facility to add equipment and services to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
*	''Trips'' - the booked trip for the job, in terms of pickup and drop-off times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Details tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you enter all of the details for a new order, or amend details for an existing order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Details.png|''Details tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Type''&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer Ref'' - generated automatically by the system when the job is saved.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Breakdown Ref'' - a third-party reference.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Authorisation Code'' - required authorisation code from the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Invoice To'' - the parent customer. A lookup is provided with search criteria. If a parent customer is selected, this will filter the Customer lookup. If you enter a customer first, the Invoice To field will automatically populate.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Customer'' - the customer. A lookup is provided with search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Actual Customer'' - a text field for reporting purposes - only entered when the customer selected is a &amp;quot;slush account&amp;quot; combining many small customers. This will appear in the customer name on the service report if populated.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Use Planning Region'' - limit the selection of locations to those your user is allowed to see.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Job Location'' - the job location. A lookup is provided. The lookup will show only the addresses for that customer, and optionally only those within your user's configured planning region.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Depot'' - the owning depot of the job - this will default to your configured depot. A lookup is provided. The lookup will sort based on the distance away from the callout location, and this distance is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Carrier'' - the depot executing the job. This will default to your configured depot. A lookup is provided. The lookup will sort based on the distance away from the callout location, and this distance is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
* ''ETA Requirement'' - the service level. A drop-down list of service levels is provided.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg No/Fleet No'' - the vehicle being serviced for non-fleet inspection jobs. A lookup is provided with search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the call-out is not at a known address, the user can search for and select a location from the map, which will create a new location for the job and customer. There are editing facilities to the address after selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also add a new vehicle for this customer and location using the {{Button|New Vehicle}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
You will be prompted to enter:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Reg No/Fleet No'': This is required.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Vehicle Type'': This is required. You can select from a drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description'': This is freetext and optional.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Axle Configuration'': This is optional. See notes below.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Fleet Location'': This will default to the fleet location selected as the job destination location. You can change this through the lookup provided.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|&lt;br /&gt;
* Once a vehicle is created without a configuration in the call logging screen, this vehicle cannot then be amended in this screen to add the configuration. The Vehicle Fleet Maintenance screen can be used to modify the vehicle and add a configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
* The selected vehicle may now not have an axle configuration against it, so the tyre positions will not be known. In this case, the screen will check and will only allow van stock to be booked if the vehicle does not have an axle configuration associated to it.&lt;br /&gt;
* If fitment of new or other tyres, or services are to be installed on the vehicle, then you should write the position and required work in the notes, so that the technician can see them and do the work required. Tyres should be booked as van stock if required.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have added these details and saved, you can move on to other details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contact tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab shows all of the end customer contact information for the order in a table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Contacts.png|''Contacts tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Contacts - any contacts you have added or amended against this order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Location Contacts - pre-saved contacts against the location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The {{Button|New Order Contact}} button will create a new order contact in the table below. You can also save this new contact to the location for re-use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location contacts are preconfigured for contact preferences:&lt;br /&gt;
* Report - use this contact to email the completed service report.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tracking - use this contact to email tracking emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, order contacts can be specified for Text, which will send the phone information against that contact to the EPOD system, so the technician can contact the customer directly via text or phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any location contacts that are checked will be used - if you want to change that, select the contact and save as an order contact, and change the contact preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tyres tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays the summary of types of items on the order (the order lines) and can display each individual order item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays the order summary (lines) in a table with the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Work Type'' - one of Fit New, Fit Other, Services Only, Van Stock, Removal.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Position''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Services'' - popup to show services booked on this line.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Product''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Description''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Store''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Quantity''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Price''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres3.png|''Tyres panel''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can click on an existing tyre to edit it, or add a new tyre with the {{Button|New}} button. In both cases, the screen will display the Items popup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be allowed to select the type of work being booked to a job when selecting tyres:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fit New&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fit Other&lt;br /&gt;
*	Services Only&lt;br /&gt;
*	Van Stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general, most deliverables work the same way:&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a vehicle position&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a product using the Part Search lookup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-PartSearch1.png|''Part Search Parameters''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Search allows you to select parameters for the search - they are matched partially:&lt;br /&gt;
* Product&lt;br /&gt;
* Depot&lt;br /&gt;
* Description&lt;br /&gt;
* Manufacturer&lt;br /&gt;
The screen also displays the nearest stock holding location, for information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching parts are displayed, and you can select the part you need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-PartSearch2.png|''Part Search Results''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Fit New:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Select a depot and position.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Search for a part using the part search.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Once selected, all of the details are displayed, and the quantity is defaulted to 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres2.png|''Fit New''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Work Type	Option select one, default to Fit New&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Defaulted&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Lookup - part search&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Set from product, can be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product -label changed to Diameter&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On clicking save, the screen will add a tyre to the selected tyres and display the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If new tyres are to be installed on the vehicle, then the user should book van stock against the job and write the position in the notes, so that the technician can see them and do the work required. Tyres should be booked as van stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Services Only, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-ServicesOnly.png|''Services Only''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Not enabled, as not selecting a product to sell&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Default from known product in position or blanknot enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from productNot enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from productNot enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will also show all services that can be supplied to that vehicle type that are related to a tyre position. The user must select at least one of these services, although several can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On saving, the service supplied will be saved and displayed in the booked work list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Van Stock, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-VanStock.png|''Van Stock''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Default to depot, select from drop-down list&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Lookup - part search&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Must be entered with a quantity greater than 0&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On clicking save, the screen will add the selected quantity of tyres and display the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Fit Other, this popup works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Tyres-FitOther.png|''Fit Other''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Depot:	Not enabled&lt;br /&gt;
*	Position:	Drop-down list based on customer vehicle, must select&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Code:	Part search, but just for product, not store, can be left blank&lt;br /&gt;
*	Product Description:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Store:	Blank&lt;br /&gt;
*	Quantity:	Default to 1, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Manufacturer:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Price:	Zero, cannot be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*	Diameter:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Size:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pattern:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Speed Rating:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
*	Load Index:	Set from product&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The part search in this instance will be searching for any product code, not specifically those sold by the depot, just any known product, as this is intended to allow the user to book customer-owned product rather that sell them a tyre from depot stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will also show all services that can be supplied to that vehicle type that are related to a tyre position. The user must select at least one of these services, although several can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Booking tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to modify the delivery date of the order based on the customer's requirements, and to select the technician and vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Booking.png|''Booking tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can manually set a booking date and time window here. This will default to today’s date, and to the expected delivery time, based on the service level. For example, if the time is 1200, and the service level is 60-90 minutes, the book time will default to 1330.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a job is created, a service level will be identified. This, along with the start/booked time, will determine the window for the job. For example, &amp;quot;60-90 minutes&amp;quot; may be a service level. If the job is booked at the correct time of 1200, the window will be 1200-1330. &lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, scheduled jobs will typically be scheduled at 0600 on the day and will be able to be completed at any time of the day.&lt;br /&gt;
This will be used to determine whether the job was completed in time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will list the Technicians assigned to that selected carrier. The screen provides decision assistance to the operator to select the correct Technician. &lt;br /&gt;
The screen will use the current workload assigned to the Technician, how long they have been working on it, how long the job is expected to take and the current location of the Technician and progress through the current job and distance to the job in question to determine the potential arrival time. The screen will also show the shifts on which the technician is assigned, to aid in identifying the out-of-hours technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system uses the hub location of the technician to determine travel time. It also uses the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;to&amp;quot; locations of the order to determine the travel time from the hub location, to the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location (to pick up product) and then to the “to” location. The system uses average loading/fitment times depending on the number of tyres selected to determine the length of a job and factors this in, along with ETAs from the device if the job is in progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the order may now be booked from an outside store location, this is the location that is used to calculate the ETA of the technician at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current job will be determined by the job in progress on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
The current location will be determined from the device location.&lt;br /&gt;
The length of the job will be determined from the actions taking place or items being delivered. This will be configured against the line type, with each configured for a number of minutes per item. There are expected to be 3:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Fitment – for example, 15 minute per tyre fitted once the location is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Tyre Supply – for example, one minute per tyre being delivered.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Inspection – for example, 5 minutes per vehicle to be inspected, with the quantity of the line set to the number of vehicles, to give finer control of how long the job is expected to be.&lt;br /&gt;
If the driver arrived 5 minutes ago, and the job is expected to take 30 minutes based on these calculations, the system will know that there is an expected 25 minutes remaining on that job before they can depart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will indicate the availability of that driver, using the assigned shift and resource availability calendar to determine whether the driver may be used. As noted, this is decision assistance - the driver may still be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may then assign the technician's van, if required. If the technician has a default vehicle or is already working in a van, then this will be defaulted to that van. You can change the van here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once selected, click the {{Button|Book}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the technician or vehicle, click the {{Button|Release}} button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the call is logged, booked and assigned to the driver, the job will be planned onto the technician's workload and sent over to their device. This will generate a workload on the device (if one does not already exist), a collection job (if picking up van stock or installing a new tyre) and a service job of the type specified to do the work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a job is booked to a technician for the first job of that day, the system creates a workload for that technician, starting at the start-up time of that driver's shift, then factoring in the time as above from the specified start time of the job, to determine the ETA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the driver has a specific hub location (i.e. does not work directly in the carrier hub location), the system will use that specific hub location to determine the start and end points of the trip and therefore the travel time to the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Services tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to view set any additional equipment or services against the order. You can select from a drop-down list of configured services or equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Services.png|''Services tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For completed jobs, the services supplied against the job will be visible here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have selected the service or equipment, you can set the quantity and add it using the {{Button|New}} button provided. The screen will add this to the displayed list of equipment and services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trips tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display any trips onto which the order has been planned, showing all pickup and drop-off stops. You can use this information to quickly answer queries from the customer as to the planning status and progress of the delivery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=340px perrow=1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:CTLTMS-CallLogging-Trips.png|''Trips tab''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display this information in a trips table, showing the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Trip Ref''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Status''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Stop Type''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Location Code''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Location Name''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Planned''.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Actual''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes section ==&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to enter notes against the order. You can see all previously-entered notes in a list, with the most recent on the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several of the actions that you take in this screen will automatically generate notes for you, to provide an audit trail of customer contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also enter any note, by keying the note in the ''Add New Note'' field and clicking the {{Button|Save}} button when you have finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen logs the creation and amendment date, time and user of all entered notes, whether they were entered automatically or manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Top-up Transfers ==&lt;br /&gt;
Top-up Transfers are a job type that allows tyres to be taken to a technician whilst on a job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a job in CTL, a new Job Type will be available called &amp;quot;Top-up Transfer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select this, the screen will allow you to select a technician and an order on which they require additional product – the screen will show the orders on the selected technician's current trip and allow them to select to job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will then copy the basic order details for a new job to transfer product to that technician. That will be customer, destination location, customer vehicle, etc. The job will not be saved automatically – the details will just be copied into the screen for you to save if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select depot and carrier like any other job.&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select product to deliver to the selected technician - this job type will be limited to just selecting van stock and entering the quantity. This will be exactly as the process selects van stock now as shown above. This involves identifying the product (through part search), selecting the product (including the store from which the product is sourced, which may be a depot store or outside store) and confirming the quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The job can then be booked to a technician to transport the product to the technician that needs it – this will be as per the normal booking process. This will be added to the transporting technician's work load, or a new work load created for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Outside Stores ==&lt;br /&gt;
All depots and hubs are stock holding locations. There are also satellite stock holding locations linked to depots, as well as stock held at customers’ depots (BRANCH locations) or at an agreed third-party location (like in a container).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When searching for products to sell, these can be sourced at any of these outside locations as well as at the depot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting tyres to install, the user can also select the store from which the tyre is to be picked up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will check the store of the tyre selected against any set up outside store (OS_STORE) locations set up in CTMS. If the location is set up, then the location will be used as the &amp;quot;from&amp;quot; location of that order, instead of the depot location. This will be displayed on the left of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will not allow selection of parts from any other location other than that outside store if it exists. &lt;br /&gt;
Note that the screen will allow selection of products from multiple stores if they do not have a corresponding outside store location set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, for example, if there are three stores for SL67:&lt;br /&gt;
*	BMAIN – the depot&lt;br /&gt;
*	BCONTAINER – a container at the depot&lt;br /&gt;
*	OSSTORE1 – an off-depot location 3 miles away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OSSTORE1 is setup in CTMS as an OS_STORE location, whereas the others are not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an order, the user can select multiple tyres from both BMAIN and BCONTAINER together on the same order, as they are both considered to be located at the same place (the depot). They cannot also select product from OSSTORE1 on the same order.&lt;br /&gt;
The order will be considered to be starting at the depot location SL67.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a different order, the user can select multiple tyres from OSSTORE1. They cannot select any tyres from BMAIN or BCONTAINER.&lt;br /&gt;
The order will be considered to be starting at the outside store location OSSTORE1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Examples of Depot Locations and Outside Stores ==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from SL67 to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL67:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from OSSL117 (outside store based at SL117) to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at OSSL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from SL67 to a known customer location CUSTLOC1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at SL67&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at CUSTLOC1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting to fit a tyre from OSSTORE1 to a roadside location OMS1, by carrier SL67, by a technician working out of SL117:&lt;br /&gt;
*	Start of trip: SL117&lt;br /&gt;
*	Pick up at OSSTORE1&lt;br /&gt;
*	Delivery (service) at OMS1&lt;br /&gt;
*	End of trip back at SL117&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:UG 440451 CTL-TMS Vehicle Fleet Reference Guide|301-{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Anw</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>